Sie sind auf Seite 1von 261

Specifications

Specifications

Electrical
Electrical components
components lay-out
lay-out

Set-up
Set-up

Handling
Handling precautions
precautions

Paper
Paper jam
jam detection
detection

Service
Service mode
mode and
and test
test mode
mode

Mechanical
Mechanical construction
construction

Circuit
Circuit board
board operation
operation

Assembly
Assembly and
and adjustments
adjustments

Timing
Timing charts
charts and
and circuit
circuit diagrams
diagrams

Replacing
Replacing the
the main
main circuit
circuit board
board
Self
Self diagnostics
diagnostics
Trouble
Trouble shooting
shooting

Parts
Parts list
list -- exploded
exploded views
views

Contents
Contents pages
pages

Parts
Parts list
list index
index

Manual
Manual front
front cover
cover

**

PointSource Vi 30 Service manual (including parts lists)

354

1-1-1 Specifications
Type ............................................... Desktop transceiver/receiver
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 4.2 A
220 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 2.1 A
Power consumption ....................... Rated: 500 W (220 - 240 V AC), 500 W (120 V AC)
In ready mode: 500 W (220 - 240 V AC),
500 W (120 V AC)
During receiving: Normal mode
500 W (220 - 240 V AC),
500 W (120 V AC)
In auto shutoff mode: 15 W or less
(220 - 240 V AC)
15 W or less (120 V AC)
Dimensions .................................... 403 mm (W) 308 mm (D) 240 mm (H)
157/8" (W) 121/8" (D) 97/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 8.72 kg/193/16 Ibs
Option ............................................ Memory board (1 M bytes, 2 M bytes), Extension
memory (4 M bytes/SIMM)
Facsimile function
Applicable line ................................
Compatibility ..................................
Communications system ................
Modulation .....................................
Encoding system ............................
Error correction ..............................
Modem speed ................................
Minimum transmission rate ............
Transmission time ..........................
Memory capacity ............................
Resolution mode ............................
Gray-scale ......................................
Functions .......................................

Subscription telephone line


Group 3
Half-duplex
TCM, QAM, PhM
MMR, MH, MR
ITU-T ECM
14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400/300 bps with
automatic fallback
10 ms/line (normal mode), 5 ms/line (fine mode)
Within 7 s (ITU-T #1 chart, MMR (ECM), memory
transmission)
256 k bytes
Normal mode, Fine mode, Super fine mode
64 levels
Refer to table 1-1-1 on page 1-1-2

1-1-1

354
Table 1-1-1
Operation features

Reliability features

Reporting features

Memory features

Telephone features

1-1-2

One-touch dialing (10 destinations)


Abbreviated number dialing (50 destinations)
Group dialing (10 destinations)
Auto redialing
Manual redialing
Remote switching
Transmit reservation
Automatic reduction in reception mode
Automatic FAX/TEL switching
D.R.D. (Distinctive ring service) reception (For inch models
only)
Timer controlled transmit function
Polling communications
Memory polling
TTI
ECM
Transmit/Receive terminal display
Retransmission for error communication
Activity report
Transmission report
Error report
Preset (Setting/registration) list
Power failure report
Memory file report
G3 monitor report
Class 1 report
Out-of-paper (memory) reception function
Broadcast function (50 destinations)
Dual access
Batch transmission
Memory transfer
Pulse tone transmission
TAD reception / Message telephone reception

354
Copy function
Copy speed ....................................
Resolution mode ............................
Copy mode .....................................
Magnification ratios ........................
Continuous copying .......................

6 sheets/min (A4R/81/2" 11" R)


Fine mode, Half tone mode
Sort copy mode, Group copy mode
70 - 100% (1% increments)
1 - 99 sheets

Document image reading section (ADF)


Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by contact image sensor
Auxiliary scanning line density ....... Horizontal/Vertical
Normal (8 dot/mm 3.85 line/mm)
Fine (8 dot/mm 7.7 line/mm)
Super fine (8 dot/mm 15.4 line/mm)
Document reading system ............. Document moving system
Light source ................................... LED
Document set position ................... Width adjustable with the document centered on the
contact image sensor
Document feed ............................... Automatic feed
(Up to 20 documents can be set on the document
table at one time. However, paper of any thickness
other than 64 - 80 g/m2 or of a smaller size such as
A5, 81/2" 51/2" should be fed one at a time.)
Document type ............................... Sheet
Document size ............................... Folio, A4R - A5R/81/2" 14" - 51/2" 41/4"
Document size (Width) ................... 140 mm - 216 mm, 51/2" - 81/2"
Document size (Length) ................. 128 mm - 1000 mm, 51/16" - 391/4"
Document thickness ....................... 50 - 160 g/m2
Effective scanning width ................ 202 mm or more (A4R),
208 mm or more (81/2" 11"),
Printing section
Printing system ..............................
Warm-up time ................................
Paper feed system .........................
Paper capacity ...............................

Paper size ......................................

Paper .............................................
Drum charging system ...................
Exposure light source ....................
Scanning ........................................
Photoconductor ..............................

Laser diode and electrophotography


40s or less (at 20C/68F, 65% RH)
Automatic from paper feed tray
100 sheets (Plain paper, 64 - 80 g/m2 (16 - 20 lbs),
letterhead)
10 envelopes (COM-10, C5, DL, Monarch)
1 sheet (OHP film, label)
A4R - A5R, 81/2" 14" - 81/2" 51/2" R
(However, the only sizes that can be used for
facsimile are A4R, 81/2" 11", and 81/2" 14".)
Plain paper, OHP film, labels, letterhead and
envelopes
Single positive corona charge
Laser diode
Polygon mirror
OPC (drum, 16 mm in diameter)

1-1-3

354
Developing system ......................... Dry non-magnetic reverse developing
(1) Developer: Single-component
(2) Toner replenishment: Imaging unit replacement
Image transfer system ................... Transfer roller
Separation system ......................... Curvature separation
Toner recycle system ..................... Recover by developing roller
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller
(1) Heat source:
Halogen heater 400 W (220 - 240 V AC),
400 W (120 V AC)
(2) Control temperature: 160C/320F
(3) Abnormally high temperature preventive
measure:
Thermostat (145C/293F ,150C/302F)
(4) Fixing pressure: 39.2 N (one side: 19.6 N)
Printing/Scanning system (Option)
Hardware (Computer) .................... A true IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible computer
OS (Operating system) .................. Microsoft Windows 3.1, 3.11, Windows 95 or
Windows for work groups
Interface ......................................... Printing system
Parallel interface (36-pin, IEEE 1284)
Scanning system
Serial interface (24-pin, RS-232C)
PDL
(Page description language) ........ GDI, PCL 4.5
Recording resolution
(When used as a printer) ............. 600 dpi/300 dpi (GDI), 300 dpi (PCL)
Scanner driver ................................ Correspond to TWAIN

1-1-4

354

1-2-1 Consumables
( 1 ) Paper
Keep paper in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. If the facsimile is not going to
be used for a long period, remove the paper from the paper feed tray and seal in the
wrapping paper it was originally supplied in.
( 2 ) Imaging unit
Keep the Imaging unit in a cool and dry place away from direct sunlight. Always store it
horizontally. Storing it upside down or on its side may result in poor printing or leaking
toner.

1-2-2 Precautions for Operation


1. Do not open the machine while printing is in progress; it will cause a jam.
2. Attach the paper feed tray correctly. A jam may otherwise occur.
3. Adjust the positions of the width guides according to the width of the paper to be
used. A jam may otherwise occur.
4. Do not open the ADF cover while document reading is in progress; it will cause a
jam.
5. Adjust the positions of the width guides according to the width of the document to be
used. A jam may otherwise occur.
6. Only use documents of the same width at one time. A jam may otherwise occur.
7. Replace the imaging unit when REPLACE IU (For inch models), CHANGE IU (For
metric models) appears on the message display to keep the printed image clean and
clear.
8. Always keep the imaging unit horizontally.
9. While checking the laser scanning unit, PROTECT yourself from the laser, which is
invisible and can harm the eyes.

1-2-1

354

1-2-3 Document
( 1 ) Types of document
This machine can use the following types of document
Sizes: Folio, A4R - A5R/81/2" 14" - 51/2" 41/4"
(Width: 140 mm - 216 mm, 51/2" - 81/2", Length: 128 mm - 1000 mm, 51/16" - 391/4")
(However, documents that are longer than 355 mm/14" must be assisted by hand
while they pass by. Also, the maximum length setting can be changed with memory
switch No. 51.)
Thickness: 50 g/m2 - 160 g/m2
Capacity
Up to 20 documents can be set on the document table at one time. (However, paper
of any thickness other than 64 - 80 g/m2 or of a smaller size such as A5, 81/2" 51/2"
should be fed one at a time.)
[Precautions]
The area within 4 mm from top or bottom and 10 mm from right or left side of a
document may not be transmitted.
The size of paper printed at destination party may differ from the one which was used
for transmitting.
When an documents longer than the maximum length passes by, this is treated as a
document jam and DOCUMENT JAM is displayed in the message display.
Very low density characters may not be printed on the destination facsimile unit.
Do not transmit hand-written or stamped documents until they are completely dry.
Remove clips and staples from documents before transmitting. (After removing the
staples, fan the documents to ensure they do not stick together.)
Documents that do not meet size and thickness requirements may not be transmitted
successfully.
Do not feed different size documents through the ADF simultaneously or jams may
occur.
If some of the document are crinkled, bent or curled, make those flat, and be careful
to insert those documents.

1-2-2

354

1-2-4 Paper
( 1 ) Types of paper
This machine can use the following types of paper.
Plain paper
A4R - A5R, 81/2" 14" - 81/2" 51/2" R
(However, the only sizes that can be used for facsimile reception are A4R, 81/2"
11", and 81/2" 14".)
Weight (thickness): 64 - 80 g/m2 (16 Ibs - 20 Ibs)
Number of sheets that can be loaded at one time: 100 sheets
Letterhead
Number of sheets that can be loaded at one time: 100 sheets
Envelopes (When only used as printer)
Types: COM-10, C5, DL, Monarch
Number of envelopes that can be loaded at one time: 10 sheets
* When setting envelopes, place envelopes on the paper feed tray with the side to
be printed facing backward and the flap on the right.
Others (When only used as printer)
OHP film (3 M (PP2500, TY731) recommended) and labels
Number of items that can be loaded at one time: 1 sheet
* When printing on OHP film, be sure to install the OHP transparency guide
provided.
[Precautions]
Do not use the following, otherwise a paper jam or a machine problem might occur.
Paper
Sheets with punched holes, perforations, tears, folds or creases.
Damp or curled sheets.
Sheets with staples or clips.
Sheets that have already been passed through a copier or a printer.
Sheets with glue or adhesive on them.
Envelopes
With metal tabs, hooks or strings.
With openings, plastic films, tape or other types of paper.
With glue visible under folded areas.
With stamps.
OHP film
Types not specifically designed for machine can be deformed by heat during
printing.
Labels
Labels already peeling off their backing.
With adhesive visible.

1-2-3

354

1-3-1 Machine parts names and their functions


( 1 ) Main body

7
3

2
8
9
@

(Front view)

Figure 1-3-1
1 Operation panel ..................................... Use to operate the fax.
2 Document table ..................................... Where to set documents to be transmitted
or copied.
3 Document guides .................................. Adjust to match the width of documents.
4 Paper feed tray ...................................... 100 sheets capacity (standard paper: 64 g/
m2 - 80 g/m2)
5 Paper feed tray cover ........................... Open when setting paper.
6 Paper guides ......................................... Adjust to match the width of the paper.
7 Paper feed tray extension ..................... Extend when setting paper.
8 Main body release lever ........................ Slide towards you to open the facsimile.
9 ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
cover ...................................................... Open when a document jams.
0 Document/Paper eject trays .................. Once ejected, documents are stacked on
the upper tray while received faxes and
copies are stacked on the lower tray.
! Imaging unit ........................................... This section of the fax plays a major role in
creating the image on received faxes and
copies. When a message is displayed
which tells you to replace the imaging unit,
replace the old unit with a new one.

1-3-1

354

*1

#
%

$
&

(Rear view)

*1

(
!

*1

@
(Internal view)

Figure 1-3-2
@ Fax moving handles .......................... Hold these handles when moving the
facsimile.
# Telephone jack .................................. For connecting the handset (*1) or a
separately purchased telephone.
$ Line jack ............................................ For connecting the fax to a telephone line
via the modular cord.
% Power receptacle .............................. For connecting the power cord.
^ Printer connector (Parallel port) ........ For connecting a 36-pin parallel cable.
& Printer connector (Serial port) ........... For connecting a 24-pin RS-232C cable.
*1 * Handset ............................................. Use as a standard telephone and when
answering calls in the manual fax reception
mode.
*1 ( Handset rest ...................................... Place the handset here when not in use.
) Paper table release buttons .............. Press when removing the paper table from
the facsimile.
*1: For inch models only

1-3-2

354
( 2 ) Handset (For inch models only)

ABC

1
GHI

P/T

O/I

2
JKL

PRS

TUV

DEF

3
MNO

6
WXY

OPER

0
M

#
LNR

0
9

Figure 1-3-3
1 Handset LED indicator ... Lights while the handset is in use. Goes out when the
handset is set properly in the handset rest or while the
hook switch is pressed.
2 Pulse/tone switch ........... Use to select between pulse and tone dialing.
* Note: This switch must be set to correspond to the type of phone service in use. A
mistake in the setting will render dialing from the handset impossible.
3 Ringer ON/OFF switch ... When set to ON ( | ), a bell rings when there is an
incoming call, and remains silent when set to OFF (O).
4 Hook switch .................... Press to disconnect the telephone line after a
conversation if you wish to place another call immediately.
5 Handset cord .................. Use to connect the handset to the telephone jack on the
fax.
6 Dialing buttons ................ Use to input the fax or telephone number of the other
party.
button ......................... Press to allow transmission of the related tone signal for
7
each key on the keypad even if your telephone service is
for pulse dialing.
8 M button (mute) .............. Press the M button to prevent the other party from hearing
your conversation. Release the M button when normal
phone conversation is desired.
9 R button (recall) .............. The Recall Function provides a convenient means of
disconnecting the telephone line after a conversation if
you wish to place another call immediately. When one call
is completed, press the R button for one or two seconds.
Then, release the R button, listen for a dial tone and dial
the next number.
0 LNR button
(redial/pause) ................. This button has the 2 following uses:
Last Number Redial
In either PULSE or TONE mode, the last number dialed is automatically stored in
memory. To use, simply press the Hook Switch for two seconds and listen for a dial
tone. Then press the LNR button and the number will automatically be redialed.
PAUSE Function
If you want to insert a pause into a dialing sequence, press the LNR button. This
inserts a pause of around 2 seconds. Press the LNR button twice for 4 seconds
(approx.), etc.

1-3-3

354
( 3 ) Operation panel
For inch models

#%^ $

Error

Function

Start

On-line

DEF

JKL

MNO

TAD

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

Stop/Reset
9

ABC

1
GHI

Enter

Auto Rx.

&

Copy

OPER

Half-Tone

On-Hook/
Clear

Redial/
Pause

Super Fine
Fine

10

Abbr.

Space

1 3 2 @ 0 9!7 5 4 6
Figure 1-3-4
1 Stop/Reset key ................... Press to stop operations in progress, revert to the initial
mode, or eject documents from the ADF (Automatic
Document Feeder).
2 Copy/Space key ................. Press to start copying or to insert a space during input
of the other partys name or fax number.
3 Start key ............................. Press to start fax transmission, manual fax reception or
other operations.
4 On-Hook/Clear key ............. Press to dial without the need to pick up the handset, or
to erase a registered fax number or other data when
registering and canceling data under a given function.
5 On-Hook indicator .............. Lit when the On-Hook/Clear key has been pressed
while the handset is still on the handset rest.
6 Redial/Pause key ............... Press to redial the last number dialed. Press also while
registering a destination number under an abbreviated
number or one-touch key in order to insert a pause of a
few seconds at that point in dialing.
7 Abbr. key ............................ Press to dial with abbreviated numbers.
8 Message display ................ Displays the present date, time, operation procedures
and trouble, etc.

1-3-4

354
9 Resolution mode select key ............ Press to select the degree of resolution most
suitable to the documents being transmitted or
copied.
0 Resolution mode indicators ............. The uppermost indicator is for the Half-Tone
mode, the middle indicator is for the Super Fine
mode, and the lowermost indicator is for the
Fine mode. Press the resolution mode select
key to light the resolution mode indicator
corresponding to the desired mode. When all of
the indicators are out, the fax is in the Normal
mode.
! Reception mode select key ............. Press to select the desired reception mode.
@ Reception mode indicators .............. The uppermost indicator is the TAD indicator.
The bottom indicator is the Auto Rx. indicator.
Press the reception mode select key to light the
reception mode indicator corresponding to the
desired mode. When using a separately
purchased telephone with answering machine
capabilities in conjunction with the fax, make
sure the TAD indicator is lit. When using the
automatic fax reception mode, make sure the
Auto Rx. indicator is lit. When using the manual
fax reception mode with the handset connected
to the facsimile, both indicators should be out.
# Function key .................................... Press to select one of the facsimiles functions
or registration procedures.
$ Enter key ......................................... Press during registration and setting
procedures to register the currently entered
data under a given function.
% Error indicator .................................. Lit when a communications error or mechanical
problem has occurred.
^ On-line indicator .............................. Lit when the facsimile is to be used as a printer
or scanner.
& Keypad ............................................ Use to dial a fax number, or to input fax
numbers for registration under abbreviated
numbers and one-touch keys.
* Even if your telephone service is for pulse dialing, press the
key after
connecting to the other party and any key pressed on the keypad after that will
transmit the related tone signal.
* One-touch keys (1 - 10) .................. Press to dial fax numbers registered under the
corresponding one-touch key. Each of the 10
keys can be designated to function as either a
one-touch key, a group dial or a batch
transmission key.
* When inputting names, etc., press one-touch key No. 9 to move the cursor to the
left, and one-touch key No. 10 to move the cursor to the right.

1-3-5

354
For metric models

# %

^$ &

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

10

C
A A

2 3 @ 0 9 ! 7 546

Figure 1-3-5
1 STOP/RESET key .................... Press to stop operations in progress, revert to the
initial mode, or eject documents from the ADF
(Automatic Document Feeder).
2 COPY/SPACE key ................... Press to start copying or to insert a space during
input of the other partys name or fax number.
3 START key ............................... Press to start fax transmission, manual fax
reception or other operations.
4 ON-HOOK/CLEAR key ............. Press to dial without the need to pick up the
receiver of a separately purchased telephone, or to
erase a registered fax number or other data when
registering and deleting data under a given function.
5 ON-HOOK indicator .................. Lit when the ON-HOOK/CLEAR key has been
pressed while the telephone receiver is still on the
hook.
6 PAUSE/REDIAL key ................. Press while registering a destination number under
an abbreviated number or one-touch key in order to
insert a pause of a few seconds at that point in
dialling. Press also to redial the last number dialled.
7 ABBR. key ................................ Press to dial with abbreviated numbers.
8 Message display ...................... Displays the present date, time, operation
procedures and trouble, etc.

1-3-6

354
9 Resolution mode select key ..... Press to select the degree of resolution most
suitable to the documents being transmitted or
copied.
0 Resolution mode indicators ...... The uppermost indicator is for the PHOTO MODE
setting, the middle indicator is for the SUPER FINE
mode, and the lowermost indicator is for the FINE
mode. Press the resolution mode select key to light
the resolution mode indicator corresponding to the
desired mode. When all of the indicators are out,
the fax is in the NORMAL mode.
! Reception mode select key ...... Press to select the desired reception mode.
@ Reception mode indicators ....... The uppermost indicator is the MESSAGE TEL.
indicator. The bottom indicator is the MANUAL RX.
indicator. Press the reception mode select key to
light the reception mode indicator corresponding to
the desired mode. When using a separately
purchased telephone with message telephone
capabilities in conjunction with the fax, make sure
the MESSAGE TEL. indicator is lit. When using the
manual fax reception mode with a separately
purchased telephone connected to the facsimile,
make sure the MANUAL RX. indicator is lit. When
using the automatic fax reception mode, both
indicators should be out.
# FUNCTION key ........................ Press to select one of the facsimiles functions or
registration procedures.
$ ENTER FUNCTION key ........... Press during registration and setting procedures to
register the currently entered data under a given
function.
% ERROR indicator ...................... Lit when a communications error or mechanical
problem has occurred.
^ ON LINE indicator .................... Lit when the facsimile is to be used as a printer or
scanner.
& Keypad ..................................... Use to dial a fax number, or to input fax numbers
for registration under abbreviated numbers and
one-touch keys.
* Even if your telephone service is for pulse dialling, press the
key after
connecting to the other party and any key pressed on the keypad after that will
transmit the related tone signal.
* One-touch keys (1 - 10) ........... Press to dial fax numbers registered under the
corresponding one-touch key. Each of the 10 keys
can be designated to function as either a one-touch
key, a group dial or a batch transmission key.
* When inputting names, etc., press one-touch key No. 9 to move the cursor to the
left, and one-touch key No. 10 to move the cursor to the right.

Note: Available functions may differ depending upon the country and region where this unit
was purchased.

1-3-7

354

1-3-2 Machine cross sections

1
2

3
6

Paper path (Document)


Paper path (Paper)
Laser beam path

Figure 1-3-6 Machine cross sections


1
2
3
4
5
6

1-3-8

Document feed/image reading sections (ADF) (P.1-3-11)


Paper feed section (P.1-3-13)
Laser scanning unit (P.1-3-15)
Imaging unit (P.1-3-18)
Transfer/charge erasing sections (P.1-3-20)
Fixing section (P.1-3-21)

354

1-3-3 Drive system

2
1

*
&
@
!
# 5
8
4 0

^
%
$

67 9

Figure 1-3-7 Drive system 1 (Printing section)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0

Main motor gear


Motor gear 96/20
Drive gear 64
Drum drive gear 25/22
Drive flange (Imaging unit)
Fixing drive gear 20
Fixing drive gear 20/28
Heat roller gear
Fixing idle gear
Eject roller gear

!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)

Developing drive gear 20/32


Developing joint gear 32
Developing drive gear 16
Paper feed drive gear 18/21
Paper feed drive gear 16/24
Paper feed drive gear 20
Upper feed roller gear
Paper feed idle gear 20
Paper feed clutch gear
Drive joint gear 24

1-3-9

354

6
7

5
4
3
2
1

Figure 1-3-8 Drive system 2 (Document feed section (ADF))


1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

ADF motor gear


Idle gear 16/65
Idle gear 21
Joint gear 37

ADF conveying gear 36


Idle gear 16/37
ADF paper feed gear 51
ADF conveying gear 36

1
2

4 3

Figure 1-3-9 Drive system 3 (Imaging unit)

1
2
3
4

1-3-10

Developing drive gear 16 (Main body)


Developing roller gear
Developing idle gear 20
Idle gear 25/18

5
6
7
8

Sub-roller gear
Idle gear 30
Agitation gear
Drive flange (drum)

354

1-3-4 Mechanical construction


( 1 ) Document feed/image reading sections (ADF)
The document feed and image reading sections comprise the parts shown in Figure 13-10. This structure conveys the document set on the document table onto the contact
image sensor (CIS) and scans the document image.
When a document is placed on the document table and the document detection switch
(DDSW) comes on, the ADF motor (ADFM) comes on, the document is fed and stops at
the space between the ADF pad and the ADF paper feed roller, and the machine enters
the ready state in the transmission or the copy mode. (ADF preparatory operation). After
the preparatory operation completes, the ADF motor (ADFM) goes off. By pressing Start
or Copy/Space key, the ADF motor (ADFM) comes on and the set document is fed in
the direction of the arrow shown in the figure 1-3-10 individually by the rotation of the
ADF paper feed roller, the ADF conveying roller, and the ADF eject roller. At this time,
the ADF pad prevents multiple documents from feeding simultaneously.
A image printed on the fed document is read when it passes on the contact image
sensor (CIS).

4
5
6
7
8
9
6

# @

! 0

Figure 1-3-10 Document feed/image reading sections


1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Document table
ADF guide
ADF pad
Document detection switch (DDSW)
Pad holder
Upper ADF pulley
ADF timing switch (ADFTIMSW)

8
9
0
!
@
#
$

CIS upper sheet


CIS holder
ADF eject roller
Contact image sensor (CIS)
ADF conveying roller
ADF paper feed roller
ADF housing

1-3-11

354

CN11-11
CN11-14

DDSW
CPCB
ADFTIMSW
CN15-1
~CN15-10
CN13-1
~CN13-6

CIS
ADFM

Figure 1-3-11 Document feed/image reading sections block diagram

1-3-12

354
( 2 ) Paper feed section
The paper feed section comprises the parts shown in Figure 1-3-12. This mechanism
conveys the paper set on the paper feed tray to the imaging unit and transfer/charge
erasing sections synchronized with the image writing timing.

23
4

5
6

98

Figure 1-3-12 Paper feed section


1
2
3
4
5

Paper feed tray


Paper size switch (PSSW)
Paper feed pulley
Paper feed switch (FSW)
Upper feed roller

6
7
8
9

Transfer guide
Lower feed roller
Paper feed pad
Pad holder

1-3-13

354

CN17-2
CN17-6

CN5-1

PSSW

CPCB

FSOL

CN6-1
~CN6-6

FSW

MM

Figure 1-3-13 Paper feed section block diagram

M. SYNC signal: ON

3s

OFF
MM
Full speed
0.6 s *1

FSOL

3s

Timing chart 1-3-1 Paper feed


Paper feed
A When the polygon motor (PM) reaches the specified rotation rate and the M.SYNC
signal comes on, the main motor (MM) comes on, the machine drive starts, and the
upper and lower feed rollers start rotating.
*1: In this time, the main motor (MM) starts rotating at minimum speed, its speed
increases in steps, and after about 0.6 s, it reaches full speed (the specified
rotation rate).
B 3 s after M.SYNC signal comes on, the paper feed solenoid (FSOL) comes on, the
paper feed pulley rotates, and the paper feed starts.
C 3 s later, the paper feed solenoid (FSOL) goes off and the paper feed pulley rotation
stops. Subsequently, the paper is conveyed to the imaging unit and the transfer/
charge erasing sections by the upper and lower feed rollers.

1-3-14

354
( 3 ) Laser scanning unit
The laser scanning unit comprises the parts shown in Figure 1-3-14, 1-3-15.
The laser scanning unit projects onto the drum surface the laser beam emitted from the
laser diode which is turned on or off according to a laser control signal (LD signal) from
the control PCB (CPCB).
This forms a static latent image on the drum surface exposed to the laser beam.

2
3
4
5
6
#
@
!
0
9

Figure 1-3-14 Laser scanning unit ( 1 )


1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Cover
Polygon motor control board
Mirror
Polygon mirror
Polygon motor (PM)
Lens
BD sensor

8
9
0
!
@
#

Correction cylinder lens


Laser diode board (with BD sensor)
Cylindrical lens
Lens
Mirror
BD sensor mirror

1-3-15

354

8
6
to Drum

5
to Drum

2 3
9

0
Figure 1-3-15 Laser scanning unit ( 2 )
1 Laser diode ............................... Emits a laser beam to form a latent electrostatic
image onto the drum surface.
2 Collimator lens .......................... Collimates the laser beam.
3 Cylindrical lens ......................... Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the
printing resolution.
4 Mirror ........................................ Reflects the laser beam onto the polygon mirror.
5 Polygon mirror .......................... Six-face mirror that revolves at approx.8504 rpm
with each face deflecting the laser beam for one
horizontal scan.
6 Lens .......................................... Corrects for the laser beam scanning speed which
becomes greater closer to the drum edge (Keeping
the beam diameter constant), and corrects for the
vertical inclination of the polygon mirror to ensure
that all the focal points of the laser beam are on the
same plane.
7 Mirror ........................................ Reflects the laser beam onto the drum surface.
8 BD sensor mirror ...................... Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to the
horizontal synchronous signal.
9 Correction cylinder lens ............ Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam
reflected onto the BD sensor.
0 BD sensor ................................. Detects the laser beam to output the beam detect
signal to the control PCB (C PCB) to provide timing
for the horizontal synchronous signal (HSYNC)
inside the control PCB.

1-3-16

354
The laser beam spot is oval as shown in Figure 1-3-16.

100 m

80 m

Figure 1-3-16
The horizontal scanning is provided by the polygon mirror while the vertical scanning is
provided by the rotating drum. The letter A, for example, is reproduced as a static
latent image onto the drum surface as shown in Figure 1-3-17.
The laser diode turns on at a position corresponding to a black dot dispelling electrical
charge from this position.
The center of the laser beam spot on one scan line is separated from those on adjacent
scan lines but adjacent scan lines overlap slightly.

Horizontal scanning

Vertical scanning

: Laser diode is on where the letter is formed.

Figure 1-3-17

1-3-17

354
( 4 ) Imaging unit
The imaging unit comprises the parts shown in Figure 1-3-18. The developing section,
drum section, and main charger are combined in a single unit.
Developing section
The developing section forms the toner image by making toner adhere to the latent
static image formed onto the drum. The toner is agitated by the developing agitation
paddle and fed to the developing roller by the sub-roller.
The toner fed onto the developing roller forms a uniform layer. The thickness of the
layer formed is held constant by the developing blade. At this time, the toner is
positively charged by the friction between the developing blade and the developing
roller.
Also, the developing bias voltage is applied to the developing roller and sub-roller. This
bias voltage dominates the amount of toner developing (toner adhering) onto the drum.
When the developing bias voltage is higher than the drum surface potential, the toner
adheres to the drum, developing the image. Also, when the developing bias voltage is
lower than the drum surface potential, the toner does not adhere to the drum and
developing is not carried out.
The developing bias voltage is set to + 400 V (image area voltage) and is applied at the
same time as the main charging starts. However, normally when the + 400 V bias
voltage is applied, the area between the main charger and the developing roller where
the main charger does not charge (non-image area) passes the developing roller, the
developing bias voltage is higher than the drum surface potential of that area and toner
developing (adhering) occurs. Therefore, on this machine, when printing, until the nonimage area passes the developing roller, a 200 V (non-image area section voltage)
developing bias voltage is applied to prevent developing of the non-image area.
Drum, main charger
By applying high voltage (+ DC) to the charger wire, positive corona discharge is carried
out and the drum OPC layer is positively charged. The charger grid is installed on the
main charger so that the charge discharged by the charger wire charges on the drum
evenly. Also, in order to remove paper powder etc. from the drum, a cleaning brush is
installed on the main charger.

3
4

#
!0
@

9 8 7

65

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@

Upper developing roller seal


Developing roller
Drum
Cleaning brush
Charger wire
Drum housing
Main charger
Charger grid
Developing blade
Sub-roller
Developer agitation paddle
Toner empty detection sensor
(TEDS)
# Developing housing

Figure 1-3-18 Imaging unit

1-3-18

354

CPCB
Developing roller

HVTPCB

Drum

Sub-roller
CN1-2
CN1-4
TEDS

Main charger

CN1-5
CN1-6

MC/DB1 REM
DB CHG1
DB CHG2
ALARM

CN4-2
CN4-4
CN4-5
CN4-6
CN3-2

Figure 1-3-19 Imaging unit block diagram

M. SYNC signal: ON

ESW: OFF

ESW
MM

D
OFF
Forward
Reverse

4s

0.5 s
0.6 s *1
*2

MC REM
DB1 REM
DB CHG1
DB CHG2

A
B

1.5 s
0.2 s

*1: The main motor (MM) starts rotating at minimum speed, its speed increases in
steps, and after about 0.6 s, it reaches full speed (the specified rotation rate).
*2: The motor shaft rotates in reverse about two rotations.

Timing chart 1-3-2 Imaging unit operation


Imaging unit operations
A When the image writing is ready and the M.SYNC signal comes on, the main motor
(MM) comes on and the machine drive starts. At the same time, the main charger
and the developing bias (DB1 REM) come on. At this time, the non-image area
voltage 1 ( 200 V) is output as the developing bias voltage.
B 1.5 s after the main motor (MM) comes on, the developing bias change signal 1 (DB
CHG1) comes on and in order to carry out the non-image/image area change
correctly, the developing bias voltage is changed to the non-image area voltage 2 (0
V).
C 0.2 s after the developing bias change signal 1 (DB CHG1) comes on, the
developing bias change signal 2 (DB CHG2) comes on and the developing bias
voltage is changed to the image area voltage (+ 400 V).
D When the printing is complete, the paper is ejected, and the eject switch (ESW)
goes off, then the main motor (MM), main charger, and developing bias go off.

1-3-19

354
( 5 ) Transfer/charge erasing sections
The transfer/charge erasing sections comprise the parts shown in Figure 1-3-20.
Transfer roller
The transfer roller is installed above the drum and electrically transfers the toner image
onto the drum surface to the paper. High voltage ( DC) is applied to the transfer roller
(inductive urethane foam roller), charging a negative charge larger than the positive
toner charge charged on the drum surface, attracting the toner on the drum surface to
the paper, and thus transferring the toner image to the paper.
1 s after the paper feed switch (FSW) comes on, the transfer roller (transfer charge)
comes on and 1 s after the paper feed switch (FSW) goes off, the transfer roller
(transfer charge) goes off.
Cleaning lamp
The cleaning lamp (CL) removes the residual charge on the drum surface by lighting to
the drum so that the toner remaining on the drum surface after transfer is correctly
recovered to the imaging unit (developing section).
The cleaning lamp (CL) comes on at the same time as the main motor (MM) and goes
off when the main motor (MM) stops for reverse processing.

1
2
1 Transfer roller
2 Cleaning lamp (CL)
3 Drum

3
Figure 1-3-20 Transfer/charge erasing sections

CN5-4
CN4-3

TC REM

CN1-3
CL

CPCB

HVTPCB

Transfer roller

Drum

Figure 1-3-21 Transfer/charge erasing sections block diagram

1-3-20

354
( 6 ) Fixing section
The fixing section comprises the parts shown in Figure 1-3-22. The fixing section uses
heat and pressure to fuse the toner image transferred to the paper. The heat roller is
heated by the fixing heater (H). During printing, the heat roller temperature is controlled
to be a constant 160C/320F by switching the fixing heater on/off according to the heat
roller surface temperature detected by the fixing thermistor (TH). When printing ends,
the fixing heater (H) goes off.
If the temperature becomes abnormally high, the fixing thermistor (TH) detects the high
temperature abnormality, fixing thermostats 1 and 2 (FTH1, 2) go off, and the power
supply to the fixing heater (H) is cut off.
The press roller is pressed against the heat roller by the press springs at both ends. The
pressure between the press roller and heat roller is approx. 39.2 N (19.6 N one side).
Separating the paper from the heat roller
There are two separation claws on the fixing unit lower housing. When the paper
passes the fixing section, they prevent the paper from sticking to the heat roller and
wrapping around it. The separation claws are constantly pressed in the direction of
contact with the heat roller by the separation claw spring.

1
2
3
0

9
8

7 6

Figure 1-3-22 Fixing section


1
2
3
4
5

Fixing unit upper housing


Press roller
Eject pulley
Eject roller
Separation claw

6
7
8
9
0

Eject switch (ESW)


Heat roller
Fixing thermistor (TH)
Fixing unit lower housing
Fixing heater (H)

1-3-21

354

CN2-1
AC input
NEUTRAL
Fuse
LIVE
Fuse

CN1-10

H REM

Noise
Filter

CN1-7

CN3-1
Heater
control circuit
PSPCB

CN5-1

CPCB

CN6-1

FTH2

FTH1

H
TH

Figure 1-3-23 Fixing section block diagram

1-3-22

CN18-1

PointSource Vi 30 Parts list


Published in May.97
84354120

Contents
FIG.1

EXTERIOR COVERS

FIG.2

FRAMES

FIG.3

PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION

FIG.4

DRIVING SECTION

10

FIG.5

CHARGING SECTION

12

FIG.6

FIXING SECTION

14

FIG.7

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

16

FIG.8

PAPER FEED SECTION

18

FIG.9

IMAGING UNIT

20

FIG.10 ACCESSORIES AND OPTION

22

FIG.11 SPECIFIED PARTS FOR EACH COUNTRY

24

INDEX

26

FIG. 1

EXTERIOR COVERS

354-1
354

1
HCD

HCD

HCD
HCD

HCD

3
14

21

17
HCD

BBB

18
20

13

19
10

HCD

12

6
9

HCD

16

11

F
4

FIG. 1
Ref.
No.

EXTERIOR COVERS
Part. No.

354-1
354
Description

Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

35404010
35402080
35402090
35402230
35404020
35404030
35404040
35404050
35404110
35404120
35404130
35404140
35404150
68827010

UPPER COVER
LEVER A,RELEASE
MOUNT,RELEASE LEVER
MOUNT BASE,SAFETY SWITCH
LEFT COVER
RIGHT COVER
REAR COVER
LID,MEMORY CARD
FRONT LEFT COVER
TRAY,ORIGINAL EJECT
TRAY,EJECT
LEFT RETAINER,TRAY
RIGHT RETAINER,TRAY
SWITCH,INTERLOCK

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

16
17
18
19
20
21

35420070
35402270
35402410
35402640
35402430
35402490

TRAY,EJECT AUXILIARY
LEVER,SAFETY SWITCH
WORK PLATE,LIFT UP
SPRING B,LIFT UP
COVER,LIFT UP
SPRING,SAFETY SWITCH LEVER

1
1
1
1
1
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 2

FRAMES

354-1
354

49

56 BBR

BAI

38
15

BBR

47

13

59 BBB

34

53

BBR

39

20

31

BHI

50

30
GEC

BBR

40

33

GEC

50

42

14
18

BBB

45

11

BBR

41

BBK

BBR

BBB

19

49

35

61

32

EGC

EGC

21

18

16

3 E04

BHT

8
BBB

BBR

23

57

48

44

25

BBR

29
BBR

51

24

7
54

58
37

62
27

22

28

BBR

46
BBR

BHT

2
22

22

E04
BBB

60

52

1
22

55

26

12
26

BBK

BBR

F
6

FIG. 2
Ref.
No.

FRAMES
Part. No.

354-1
354
Description

Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

35402500
35402050
35402060
35402070
35402110
35402120
35402160
35402570
35402550

LID B,BASE
LEFT HOOK,RELEASE
RIGHT HOOK,RELEASE
SHAFT,HOOK
SPRING,HOOK
MOUNT,TONER EMPTY SWITCH
UPPER FRAME
LOWER LEFT RETAINER,BALANCER
RIGHT SPRING,BALANCER

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

11
12
13
14
15
16

35402540
35402260
35305060
35402290
35402520
35402330

LEFT SPRING,BALANCER
SHIELD PLATE,UPPER FRAME
LABEL, HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION,L
LEFT LEVER,RELEASE RETAINING
STAY,FULCRUM
PLATE SPRING B,DRUM UNIT HOLDER

1
1
1
1
1
1

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

35402360
35402380
35402390
35327300
64847580
68802120
35402650
68828070
68826020
35427130
29820420
35402510
35302040
35302050
35302060
35302070
35302080
35302090

SPRING 2.5,RELEASE RETAINING


PROJECTION,DRUM UNIT LIMITATION(EUR)
SHEET,FRAME SHIELD(EUR)
GROUND WIRE,CLEANING BRUSH
BASE RUBBER(PBS)
GEAR 11/34
SPRING,TONER EMPTY DETECTION
TONER CONTROL PCB
RAIL,PCB
WIRE,EJECT SWITCH
PIN,BEARING
FRAME,MACHINE
TERMINAL,DEVELOPING BIAS
TERMINAL,SUB DEVELOPING BIAS
TERMINAL,TRANSFER MACHINE
TERMINAL,MAIN CHARGER
TERMINAL,GRID
TERMINAL,BRUSH

2
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

37
38
39
40

35302210
35302250
35302260
35302290

PLATE SPRING A,DRUM UNIT HOLDER


RIGHT LEVER,RELEASE RETAINING
GROUND PLATE,FRAME
GUIDE,DRUM SHAFT

1
1
1
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

41
42

35302360
35302400

COVER,TERMINAL
TERMINAL BASE,MAIN CHARGER

1
1

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62

35302420
35302430
35302460
35302470
35302480
35402530
35306360
66006350
35402020
35402580
35402560
35402620
35402590
35402610
35402630
78027300
35402660
66927030
M2307010

LOWER SHEET,TERMINAL INSULATOR


SPRING,MAIN CHARGER
HOLDER,SAFETY SWITCH
STRAP A,MACHINE RELEASE
STRAP B,MACHINE RELEASE
PIN,FULCRUM
CUSHION,TRAY
SWITCH,CASSETTE LIFT
MOUNT,PCB
UPPER RIGHT RETAINER,BALANCER
UPPER LEFT RETAINER,BALANCER
STOPPER,JOINT
LOWER RIGHT RETAINER,BALANCER
GROUND PLATE B,DRIVE
GROUND PLATE,SOLENOID
GROUND WIRE OPERATION UNIT
SPRING B,HOOK
CORE,9-19X11
BINDING BAND,T18R

1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

FIG. 3

PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION

354

J
1

2
1
5

4
14

13

9
13

4
11

2
10
12
3

F
8

FIG. 3
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION


Part. No.
35405060
35406010
35406020
35406030
35406040
35406050
35406060
35306090
35306100
35306110
35306190
35306340
35306420
35306430

Description
LABEL,CASSETTE OPERATION
LEVER,GUIDE RELEASE
TRAY,PAPER FEED
GUIDE,TRAY
TRAY,AUXILIARY
RIGHT CURSOR
LEFT CURSOR
RACK,CURSOR
GEAR,CURSOR
SPRING,TRAY
PAD,TRAY
SPONGE,TRAY
BRAKE,CURSOR
STOPPER,GEAR CURSOR

354
Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 4

DRIVING SECTION

354-1
354

9
7

59

50

KAM

15

KAM

28
9
26

14

59

54
16

58

25
25

24

60
2

BHT

29

30
BBB

51

12

22

13
11 10

50

1
3

23

49

20
21

61

61

E05

34

35
E05

42

39

53

37

BHI

17

18

55

E05

19

33

23

BBB

38

56

E05

21

57

E05

41
45

40

44

46
36

32

43

BBA

BBB

E05

48
47

F
10

FIG. 4
Ref.
No.

DRIVING SECTION
Part. No.

354-1
354
Description

Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

35402140
35402150
35402480
35427081
29806560
35302030
35306010
35306020
35306030
35306120
35306130
35306140
35306150
35306160
35306170
35406110
35406120
35306220
35306230
35306240
35306250
35306260
35406130
35393040
35306290
35306300

MOUNT,PAPER SIZE DETECTION


ACTUATOR,PAPER SIZE
STAY,SENSOR
WIRE,CONVEYING SWITCH
BUSHING 6
TERMINAL,DRUM GROUND
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED ROLLER
COLLAR,PAPER FEED
SPRING,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
GEAR,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
BOSS,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
COLLAR,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
HOLDER,PAD
PAD,PAPER FEED
SPRING,PAD
UPPER ROLLER,FEED
LOWER ROLLER,FEED
UPPER GEAR,FEED ROLLER
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED IDLE
BUSHING 4
ACTUATOR,PAPER FEED DETECTION
SPRING,FEED
PARTS SOLENOID PAPER FEED(SP)
BUSHING 6,FEED
GROUND PLATE,PAPER FEED

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1

28
29
30

35306330
35306350
66006350

GUIDE FILM,PAD
SPRING,ACTUATOR
SWITCH,CASSETTE LIFT

1
1
1

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

35422010
35322020
35322030
35322040
35322050
35322070
35322090
35322110
35322150

MOUNT,MOTOR
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 16/24,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 18/21,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 96/20,MOTOR
GEAR 20/32,DEVELOPING DRIVE
GEAR 25/22,DRUM DRIVE
GEAR 16,DEVELOPING DRIVE
REINFORCEMENT,DRIVE

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

11

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

35322160
35322170
35322180
35322190
35322200
35322210
35322230
35322240
35393110
63511220
63527240

GEAR 20,FIXING DRIVE


GEAR 32,DEVELOPING JOINT
GEAR 20,FIXING COUPLER
GEAR 28,FIXING COUPLER
COUPLER,FIXING DRIVE
SPRING,FIXING COUPLER
GEAR 64,DRIVE
GEAR 24,DRIVE JOINT
PARTS MOTOR MAIN(SP)
STOP RING,4
PI,GP1A71A

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1

53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

35423030
35306440
29806810
35402600
35406090
66927030
35406070
35427270
M2307010

DUCT B,COOLING
SPACER,PAD HOLDER
BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION
GROUND PLATE A,DRIVE
SPONGE B,HOLDER
CORE,9-19X11
COLLAR,PAPER FEED
WIRE,MOTOR JUNCTION
BINDING BAND,T18R

1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
4

FIG. 5

CHARGING SECTION

354-1
354

J
1

1
2
BHT

6
7
9
5
8

10

11

6
5

11

F
12

FIG. 5
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

CHARGING SECTION
Part. No.
35402340
35416010
35306380
35316120
35316020
35316030
35316050
35416020
35316110
35393132
35416030

354-1
354
Description

MOUNT,CLEANING LAMP
UPPER TERMINAL,TRANSFER
SEAL,PAPER DUST DISPOSAL
ROLLER,TRANSFER (METRIC)
BUSHING,TRANSFER
SPRING,TRANSFER
GUIDE,TRANSFER
SPRING,TRANSFER GUIDE
PULLEY C,TRANSFER ROLLER
PARTS LAMP CLEANING(SP)
SHEET,TRANSFER GUIDE FILM

Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

13

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 6

FIXING SECTION

354-1
354

J
1

1
1
BBR

11
BBR

17

19
19

27

30

29

6
2

31

BBB

16
BBB

17

24
29

14

23

30

BBR 21

28

12

13

BBB

9
18

25
22
18

20

15

BBB

26
10
RDC

F
14

FIG. 6
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

FIXING SECTION
Part. No.
35405080
35493100
35400020
35393070
35320030
35393080
35320071
35320081
35320090
35320100
35420040
35420050
35320130
35320140
35320150
35320160
35320170
35320180
35320190
35320220
35320250
35420060
35320280
35320290
35320300
35320310
35320320
35320360
35320370
35320380
29820420

354-1
354
Description

CAUTION LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE (EXP)


PARTS HEATER 230 FIXING(SP)
EJECT ROLLER ASSY
PARTS ROLLER HEAT(SP)
BUSHING,HEAT ROLLER
PARTS ROLLER PRESSURE(SP)
SEPARATION CLAW,HEAT ROLLER
PULLEY,EJECT
GEAR,HEAT ROLLER
GEAR,FIXING IDLE
UPPER HOUSING,FIXING
LOWER HOUSING,FIXING
TERMINAL,THERMOSTAT
FRONT TERMINAL,FIXING
REAR TERMINAL A,FIXING
REAR TERMINAL B,HEATER
SPRING,FIXING PRESSURE
SPRING,SEPARATION CLAW
SPRING,EJECT PULLEY
GROUND PLATE,HEAT ROLLER
THERMISTOR,FIXING
ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH
THERMAL PROTECTOR A
THERMAL PROTECTOR B
SPRING,EJECT ACTUATOR
GEAR,EJECT ROLLER
BUSHING B,HEAT ROLLER
FILM,FIXING THERMISTOR
HOLDER,PRESS ROLLER BEARING
BEARING,PRESS ROLLER
PIN,BEARING

Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

15

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 7

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

354-1
354

2
2

5
8

29

20

32

21

13

28

29

40

39
34

41

31

HCD

30

42

39

39
12

4
25

BAZ

34

16

37

36
HCD

14

15

39
35
22

14

5
10

HCD

24
3

26

HCD

17

18

HCD

19
11
6

33

HCD
HCD

38

23

HCD

27

GEC

F
16

FIG. 7

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Ref.
No.

Part. No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

35401011
35493030
76227030
35402350
67305310
35401050
35402190
35402220
35402310
35402320
35402440
35402450
35402460
35402470
35493040
35423020
M0008000
35426020
35426030
35427021
35427031
35427051
35427071
35427091
35427111
35493060
35493070
35428041
M1753010
M1752000
M1752010
35312040
35328033
61527170
66927030
35427280
73827030
35404160
M2307010
35393050

Description
CONTROLLER ASSY
PARTS OPERATION UNIT (EUR)SP
POWER CORD(220)
SHIELD PLATE,MACHINE BASE
CAUTION LABEL,HV
NCU ASSY (EUR)
MOUNT,SPEAKER
REAR MOUNT,COVER
MOUNT A,NCU PCB
MOUNT B,NCU PCB
WIND SHIELD PLATE A,MOUNT PCB
WIND SHIELD PLATE B,MOUNT PCB
WIND SHIELD PLATE C,MOUNT PCB
SPONGE,DUCT
PARTS FAN COOLING (SP)
DUCT,COOLING
SPACER,178877-2(AMP)
MOUNT,CONNECTOR
INSULATING PLATE,HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
WIRE,POWER SOURCE
WIRE,LSU
WIRE,OPERATION UNIT
WIRE,HIGH VOLTAGE
WIRE,NCU
WIRE,SOLENOID
PARTS SPEAKER (SP)
PARTS IC ROM (SP)
POWER SOURCE PCB (230)
FUSE,S506-3.15A(BUSSMANN)
FUSE,S506-2.5A(BUSSMANN)
FUSE,GDB-2A(BUSSMANN)
CAP,LSU
HIGH VOLTAGE UNIT PCB
FERRITE CORE TR
CORE,9-19X11
SHIELD,GASKET
LINE FILTER ESDR-25
COVER,HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
BINDING BAND,T18R
PARTS UNIT SCANNER(SP)

354-1
354
Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
4
1

41
42

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

17

Part. No.
35312020
35312030

Description
COVER,LSU
GROUND PLATE,LSU

Quantity
(230V)
1
1

FIG. 8

PAPER FEED SECTION

354-1
354

47
19

1
41

35
34

47

41

24 23

HCD

40

39
7

25

33
E05

27

36
HCD

12

52

2
12

1
E05

57

33

56

HCD

56

HCD

43

25

28

11

31

10

55
18
5
E04

51
16
21

15

50

51

20

54
30 29

42

E07

53
45
46

E04

37
E04

17
4

HCD
E05

E04

29
13

22
38
26

E05

14

32

HCD

49

32

44

56

F
18

FIG. 8
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

PAPER FEED SECTION


Part. No.
35402280
35411010
35411020
35411030
35411110
35411120
35411140
35411150
35411160
35411460
35411220
35411230
35411300
35411310
35411320
35411330
35411340
35411360
35411370
35411380
35411390
78022030
35411410
35411420
35411430
35427011
35427041
35427151
49028102
29717230
29804160
29806810
63511080
35411470
35411440
63511590
65907210
67322230
68811310
68811330

354-1
354
Description

HOLDER,SAFETY SWITCH LEVER


HOUSING,ADF
GUIDE,ADF
ROLLER,PAPER FEED
SQUARE SPRING,ADF PAPER FEED
FRONT SHEET,PAPER FEED
HOLDER,PAD
SPRING,PAD
ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION
SHEET,GUIDE FILM CIS
TABLE,ADF ORIGINAL
CURSOR,ADF
ROLLER,CONVEYING ADF
ROLLER,EJECT ADF
GEAR 51,ADF PAPER FEED
GEAR 16/37,IDLE
GEAR 36,ADF CONVEYING
GUIDE,CIS RETAINING
UPPER PLATE SPRING,PULLEY ADF
GEAR 37,JOINT
GROUND PLATE,ADF ROLLER
JOINT SPRING DRIVE SECTION
PAD,ADF
SHEET,ORIGINAL HOLDER
SPRING,ADF HOOK
MOTOR,ADF
WIRE,CIS
WIRE,ADF STATIC ELIMINATOR
BUSH 4
BUSHING 6,FEED BACK
PIN,ORIGINAL HOLDER
BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION
HOOK,ADF
ACTUATOR,TIMING
PLATE SPRING,PAD
STATIC ELIMINATOR B,ADF
GEAR 20,CASSETTE
BUSHING 8
UPPER SHEET,CIS
HOLDER,CIS

Quantity
(230V)

Ref.
No.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

41
42
43
44
45
46
47

68811342
68813010
35402250
35411070
35411100
35411350
66006350

UPPER PULLEY,ADF
CIS
LEVER B,RELEASE
GEAR 21,IDLE
WORK PLATE,ADF JOINT
GEAR 16/65,IDLE
SWITCH,CASSETTE LIFT

2
1
1
1
1
1
2

49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

73827030
68811430
68811440
66927030
35427270
35405140
35405130
M2307010
78027300

LINE FILTER ESDR-25


SHEET A,CIS
SHEET B,CIS
CORE,9-19X11
WIRE,MOTOR JUNCTION
CAUTION LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE A (EXP)
CAUTION LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE B (EXP)
BINDING BAND,T18R
GROUND WIRE OPERATION UNIT

1
1
2
1
1
1
1
3
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

19

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 9

IMAGING UNIT

354

F
20

FIG. 9
Ref.
No.
1

IMAGING UNIT
Part. No.
35482010

354
Description

IMAGING UNIT FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30

Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

21

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 10 ACCESSORIES AND OPTION

354-1
354

J
1

3
1
6

F
22

FIG. 10 ACCESSORIES AND OPTION


Ref.
No.

Part. No.

Description

354-1
354
Ref.
No.

Quantity
(230V)

1
2

35482960
35482980

MEMORY BOARD FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30 (2M)


MEMORY BOARD FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30 (1M)

1
1

4
5
6
7

35405040
35405110
35405050
35306410

LABEL,LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK


LABEL B,LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK
SEAL,ONE-TOUCH
GUIDE,AUXILIARY

1
1
1
1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the


assembly appearing immediately above them.

23

Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

FIG. 11 SPECIFIED PARTS FOR EACH COUNTRY

354-1
354

1
2
1

11

14

5
9
15
16

3
COUNTRY KIT FOR ITALY

10

4
12
17
18

13

6
COUNTRY KIT FOR ES
SPECIFIED PARTS FOR HONG KONG

F
24

FIG. 11 SPECIFIED PARTS FOR EACH COUNTRY


Ref.
No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Part. No.
35482510
78027560
35405250
35405260
35405170
35427380
35427390
35427310
35493110
35302330
35302350
35320260
76727300
78027610
35482950
35482030
35482960
35482980
35482520
76727300

Description
COUNTRY KIT (I) FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30
MODULAR CORD(ITALY)
LABEL GDI95,FD (U.K.)
LABEL GDI3.1,FD (U.K.)
LABEL TWAIN,FD (USA)
FD GDI95 (U.K.)
FD GDI3.1 (U.K.)
FD TWAIN (USA)
PARTS OPERATION UNIT ASSY (MAP)SP
PROJECTION,DRUM UNIT LIMITATION (EUR)
SHEET,FRAME SHIELD (EUR)
ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH
MODULAR CORD B
MODULAR CORD(HONG KONG)
SET,HANDSET
IMAGING UNIT FOR IF-350(MAP)
MEMORY BOARD FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30 (2M)
MEMORY BOARD FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30 (1M)
COUNTRY KIT(ES)FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30
MODULAR CORD B

354-1
354
Quantity
IT

ES

MHK

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

25

INDEX
Part. No.

354-1
354
Description

Quantity
(230V)

Part. No.

Fig. No.

29717230
29804160
29806560
29806810
29820420

BUSHING 6,FEED BACK


PIN,ORIGINAL HOLDER
BUSHING 6
BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION
PIN,BEARING

1
1
1
3
2

8
8
4
4, 8
2, 6

35302030
35302040
35302050
35302060
35302070
35302080
35302090

TERMINAL,DRUM GROUND
TERMINAL,DEVELOPING BIAS
TERMINAL,SUB DEVELOPING BIAS
TERMINAL,TRANSFER MACHINE
TERMINAL,MAIN CHARGER
TERMINAL,GRID
TERMINAL,BRUSH

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

4
2
2
2
2
2
2

35302210
35302250
35302260
35302290
35302330
35302350
35302360
35302400

PLATE SPRING A,DRUM UNIT HOLDER


RIGHT LEVER,RELEASE RETAINING
GROUND PLATE,FRAME
GUIDE,DRUM SHAFT
PROJECTION,DRUM UNIT LIMITATION (EUR)
SHEET,FRAME SHIELD (EUR)
COVER,TERMINAL
TERMINAL BASE,MAIN CHARGER

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
11
11
2
2

35302420
35302430
35302460
35302470
35302480

LOWER SHEET,TERMINAL INSULATOR


SPRING,MAIN CHARGER
HOLDER,SAFETY SWITCH
STRAP A,MACHINE RELEASE
STRAP B,MACHINE RELEASE

1
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2

35305060
35306010
35306020
35306030
35306090
35306100
35306110
35306120
35306130
35306140
35306150

LABEL, HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION,L


PULLEY,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED ROLLER
COLLAR,PAPER FEED
RACK,CURSOR
GEAR,CURSOR
SPRING,TRAY
SPRING,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
GEAR,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
BOSS,PAPER FEED CLUTCH
COLLAR,PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
4
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
4
4

24

Description

Quantity
(230V)

Fig. No.

35306160
35306170

HOLDER,PAD
PAD,PAPER FEED

1
1

4
4

35306190

PAD,TRAY

35306220
35306230
35306240
35306250
35306260

LOWER ROLLER,FEED
UPPER GEAR,FEED ROLLER
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED IDLE
BUSHING 4
ACTUATOR,PAPER FEED DETECTION

1
1
1
2
1

4
4
4
4
4

35306290
35306300

BUSHING 6,FEED
GROUND PLATE,PAPER FEED

2
1

4
4

35306330
35306340
35306350
35306360
35306380

GUIDE FILM,PAD
SPONGE,TRAY
SPRING,ACTUATOR
CUSHION,TRAY
SEAL,PAPER DUST DISPOSAL

1
1
1
2
1

4
3
4
2
5

35306410
35306420
35306430
35306440
35312020
35312030
35312040
35316020
35316030
35316050

GUIDE,AUXILIARY
BRAKE,CURSOR
STOPPER,GEAR CURSOR
SPACER,PAD HOLDER
COVER,LSU
GROUND PLATE,LSU
CAP,LSU
BUSHING,TRANSFER
SPRING,TRANSFER
GUIDE,TRANSFER

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1

10
3
3
4
7
7
7
5
5
5

35316110
35316120
35320030
35320071
35320081
35320090
35320100
35320130
35320140

PULLEY C,TRANSFER ROLLER


ROLLER,TRANSFER (METRIC)
BUSHING,HEAT ROLLER
SEPARATION CLAW,HEAT ROLLER
PULLEY,EJECT
GEAR,HEAT ROLLER
GEAR,FIXING IDLE
TERMINAL,THERMOSTAT
FRONT TERMINAL,FIXING

2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1

5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

354-1
354
Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

Part. No.

Fig. No.

35320150
35320160
35320170
35320180
35320190
35320220
35320250
35320260
35320280
35320290
35320300
35320310
35320320

REAR TERMINAL A,FIXING


REAR TERMINAL B,HEATER
SPRING,FIXING PRESSURE
SPRING,SEPARATION CLAW
SPRING,EJECT PULLEY
GROUND PLATE,HEAT ROLLER
THERMISTOR,FIXING
ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH
THERMAL PROTECTOR A
THERMAL PROTECTOR B
SPRING,EJECT ACTUATOR
GEAR,EJECT ROLLER
BUSHING B,HEAT ROLLER

1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
11
6
6
6
6
6

35320360
35320370
35320380
35322020
35322030
35322040
35322050
35322070
35322090
35322110
35322150
35322160
35322170
35322180
35322190
35322200
35322210
35322230
35322240
35327300
35328033
35393040
35393050
35393070
35393080
35393110

FILM,FIXING THERMISTOR
HOLDER,PRESS ROLLER BEARING
BEARING,PRESS ROLLER
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 16/24,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 18/21,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 96/20,MOTOR
GEAR 20/32,DEVELOPING DRIVE
GEAR 25/22,DRUM DRIVE
GEAR 16,DEVELOPING DRIVE
REINFORCEMENT,DRIVE
GEAR 20,FIXING DRIVE
GEAR 32,DEVELOPING JOINT
GEAR 20,FIXING COUPLER
GEAR 28,FIXING COUPLER
COUPLER,FIXING DRIVE
SPRING,FIXING COUPLER
GEAR 64,DRIVE
GEAR 24,DRIVE JOINT
GROUND WIRE,CLEANING BRUSH
HIGH VOLTAGE UNIT PCB
PARTS SOLENOID PAPER FEED(SP)
PARTS UNIT SCANNER(SP)
PARTS ROLLER HEAT(SP)
PARTS ROLLER PRESSURE(SP)
PARTS MOTOR MAIN(SP)

1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

6
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
7
4
7
6
6
4

35393132
35400020
35401011
35401050
35402020
35402050
35402060
35402070
35402080
35402090
35402110
35402120
35402140
35402150
35402160
35402190
35402220
35402230
35402250
35402260
35402270
35402280
35402290
35402310
35402320
35402330
35402340
35402350
35402360
35402380
35402390
35402410
35402430
35402440
35402450
35402460
35402470
35402480
35402490
35402500

25

Description
PARTS LAMP CLEANING(SP)
EJECT ROLLER ASSY
CONTROLLER ASSY
NCU ASSY (EUR)
MOUNT,PCB
LEFT HOOK,RELEASE
RIGHT HOOK,RELEASE
SHAFT,HOOK
LEVER A,RELEASE
MOUNT,RELEASE LEVER
SPRING,HOOK
MOUNT,TONER EMPTY SWITCH
MOUNT,PAPER SIZE DETECTION
ACTUATOR,PAPER SIZE
UPPER FRAME
MOUNT,SPEAKER
REAR MOUNT,COVER
MOUNT BASE,SAFETY SWITCH
LEVER B,RELEASE
SHIELD PLATE,UPPER FRAME
LEVER,SAFETY SWITCH
HOLDER,SAFETY SWITCH LEVER
LEFT LEVER,RELEASE RETAINING
MOUNT A,NCU PCB
MOUNT B,NCU PCB
PLATE SPRING B,DRUM UNIT HOLDER
MOUNT,CLEANING LAMP
SHIELD PLATE,MACHINE BASE
SPRING 2.5,RELEASE RETAINING
PROJECTION,DRUM UNIT LIMITATION(EUR)
SHEET,FRAME SHIELD(EUR)
WORK PLATE,LIFT UP
COVER,LIFT UP
WIND SHIELD PLATE A,MOUNT PCB
WIND SHIELD PLATE B,MOUNT PCB
WIND SHIELD PLATE C,MOUNT PCB
SPONGE,DUCT
STAY,SENSOR
SPRING,SAFETY SWITCH LEVER
LID B,BASE

Quantity
(230V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

Fig. No.
5
6
7
7
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
4
4
2
7
7
1
8
2
1
8
2
7
7
2
5
7
2
2
2
1
1
7
7
7
7
4
1
2

354-1
354
Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

Part. No.

Fig. No.

35402510
35402520
35402530
35402540
35402550
35402560
35402570
35402580
35402590
35402600
35402610
35402620
35402630
35402640
35402650
35402660
35404010
35404020
35404030
35404040
35404050
35404110
35404120
35404130
35404140
35404150
35404160
35405040
35405050
35405060
35405080

FRAME,MACHINE
STAY,FULCRUM
PIN,FULCRUM
LEFT SPRING,BALANCER
RIGHT SPRING,BALANCER
UPPER LEFT RETAINER,BALANCER
LOWER LEFT RETAINER,BALANCER
UPPER RIGHT RETAINER,BALANCER
LOWER RIGHT RETAINER,BALANCER
GROUND PLATE A,DRIVE
GROUND PLATE B,DRIVE
STOPPER,JOINT
GROUND PLATE,SOLENOID
SPRING B,LIFT UP
SPRING,TONER EMPTY DETECTION
SPRING B,HOOK
UPPER COVER
LEFT COVER
RIGHT COVER
REAR COVER
LID,MEMORY CARD
FRONT LEFT COVER
TRAY,ORIGINAL EJECT
TRAY,EJECT
LEFT RETAINER,TRAY
RIGHT RETAINER,TRAY
COVER,HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
LABEL,LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK
SEAL,ONE-TOUCH
LABEL,CASSETTE OPERATION
CAUTION LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE (EXP)

1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
10
10
3
6

35405110
35405130
35405140

LABEL B,LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION HANDB


CAUTION LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE B (EXP)
CAUTION LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE A (EXP)

1
1
1

10
8
8

35405170
35405250
35405260

LABEL TWAIN,FD (USA)


LABEL GDI95,FD (U.K.)
LABEL GDI3.1,FD (U.K.)

1
1
1

11
11
11

35406010
35406020
35406030
35406040
35406050
35406060
35406070
35406090
35406110
35406120
35406130
35411010
35411020
35411030
35411070
35411100
35411110
35411120
35411140
35411150
35411160
35411220
35411230
35411300
35411310
35411320
35411330
35411340
35411350
35411360
35411370
35411380
35411390
35411410
35411420
35411430
35411440
35411460
35411470
35416010

26

Description
LEVER,GUIDE RELEASE
TRAY,PAPER FEED
GUIDE,TRAY
TRAY,AUXILIARY
RIGHT CURSOR
LEFT CURSOR
COLLAR,PAPER FEED
SPONGE B,HOLDER
SPRING,PAD
UPPER ROLLER,FEED
SPRING,FEED
HOUSING,ADF
GUIDE,ADF
ROLLER,PAPER FEED
GEAR 21,IDLE
WORK PLATE,ADF JOINT
SQUARE SPRING,ADF PAPER FEED
FRONT SHEET,PAPER FEED
HOLDER,PAD
SPRING,PAD
ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION
TABLE,ADF ORIGINAL
CURSOR,ADF
ROLLER,CONVEYING ADF
ROLLER,EJECT ADF
GEAR 51,ADF PAPER FEED
GEAR 16/37,IDLE
GEAR 36,ADF CONVEYING
GEAR 16/65,IDLE
GUIDE,CIS RETAINING
UPPER PLATE SPRING,PULLEY ADF
GEAR 37,JOINT
GROUND PLATE,ADF ROLLER
PAD,ADF
SHEET,ORIGINAL HOLDER
SPRING,ADF HOOK
PLATE SPRING,PAD
SHEET,GUIDE FILM CIS
ACTUATOR,TIMING
UPPER TERMINAL,TRANSFER

Quantity
(230V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1

Fig. No.
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
5

354-1
354
Part. No.

Description

Quantity
(230V)

Part. No.

Fig. No.

35416020
35416030
35420040
35420050
35420060
35420070
35422010
35423020
35423030
35426020
35426030
35427011
35427021
35427031
35427041
35427051
35427071
35427081
35427091
35427111
35427130
35427151
35427270
35427280

SPRING,TRANSFER GUIDE
SHEET,TRANSFER GUIDE FILM
UPPER HOUSING,FIXING
LOWER HOUSING,FIXING
ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH
TRAY,EJECT AUXILIARY
MOUNT,MOTOR
DUCT,COOLING
DUCT B,COOLING
MOUNT,CONNECTOR
INSULATING PLATE,HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
MOTOR,ADF
WIRE,POWER SOURCE
WIRE,LSU
WIRE,CIS
WIRE,OPERATION UNIT
WIRE,HIGH VOLTAGE
WIRE,CONVEYING SWITCH
WIRE,NCU
WIRE,SOLENOID
WIRE,EJECT SWITCH
WIRE,ADF STATIC ELIMINATOR
WIRE,MOTOR JUNCTION
SHIELD,GASKET

2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2

5
5
6
6
6
1
4
7
4
7
7
8
7
7
8
7
7
4
7
7
2
8
4, 8
7

35427310
35427380
35427390
35428041
35482010
35482030
35482510
35482520
35482950
35482960
35482980
35493030
35493040
35493060

FD TWAIN (USA)
FD GDI95,(U.K)
FD GDI3.1,(U.K)
POWER SOURCE PCB (230)
IMAGING UNIT FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30
IMAGING UNIT FOR IF-350(MAP)
COUNTRY KIT (I) FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30
COUNTRY KIT(ES)FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30
SET,HANDSET
MEMORY BOARD FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30 (2M)
MEMORY BOARD FOR POINT SOURCE VI 30 (1M)
PARTS OPERATION UNIT (EUR)SP
PARTS FAN COOLING (SP)
PARTS SPEAKER (SP)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1

11
11
11
7
9
11
11
11
11
10, 11
10, 11
7
7
7

27

Description

Quantity
(230V)

35493070
35493100
35493110
49028102
61527170
63511080
63511220
63511590
63527240
64847580
65907210
66006350
66927030

PARTS IC ROM (SP)


PARTS HEATER 230 FIXING(SP)
PARTS OPERATION UNIT ASSY (MAP)SP
BUSH 4
FERRITE CORE TR
HOOK,ADF
STOP RING,4
STATIC ELIMINATOR B,ADF
PI,GP1A71A
BASE RUBBER(PBS)
GEAR 20,CASSETTE
SWITCH,CASSETTE LIFT
CORE,9-19X11

1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
4
1
4
4

67305310
67322230

CAUTION LABEL,HV
BUSHING 8

1
1

68802120
68811310
68811330
68811342
68811430
68811440
68813010
68826020
68827010
68828070
73827030
76227030
76727300
78022030
78027300
78027560
78027610
M0008000
M1752000
M1752010
M1753010
M2307010

GEAR 11/34
UPPER SHEET,CIS
HOLDER,CIS
UPPER PULLEY,ADF
SHEET A,CIS
SHEET B,CIS
CIS
RAIL,PCB
SWITCH,INTERLOCK
TONER CONTROL PCB
LINE FILTER ESDR-25
POWER CORD(220)
MODULAR CORD B
JOINT SPRING DRIVE SECTION
GROUND WIRE OPERATION UNIT
MODULAR CORD(ITALY)
MODULAR CORD(HONG KONG)
SPACER,178877-2(AMP)
FUSE,S506-2.5A(BUSSMANN)
FUSE,GDB-2A(BUSSMANN)
FUSE,S506-3.15A(BUSSMANN)
BINDING BAND,T18R

1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
12

Fig. No.
7
6
11
8
7
8
4
8
4
2
8
2, 4, 8
2, 4, 7, 8
7
8
2
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
1
2
7, 8
7
11
8
2, 8
11
11
7
7
7
7
2, 4, 7, 8


 
354

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout

Machine right side

Machine inside

Machine left side

Figure 2-1-1 Layout of electrical parts: PCBs

1. Control PCB (CPCB) ................................... Controls the PCBs and electrical


components. Modulates or
demodulates the image signal.
2. Network control unit PCB (NCUPCB) .......... Controls connection to the telephone
line.
3. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates +24 V DC, +12 V DC, +5 V
DC and 12 V DC.
4. High voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) ... Generates the main charge high
voltage (main charger), transfer charge
high voltage (transfer roller) and
developing bias voltage.
5. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) ........................ Consists of operation keys, message
display and LEDs.

2-1-1

,
#
354

Machine right side

Machine inside

Machine left side

Figure 2-1-2 Layout of electrical parts: switches and sensors

1. Safety switch (SSW) .................................... Breaks the safety circuit when the
machine is opened, and resets paper
jam detection.
2. Document detection switch (DDSW) ............ Detects the presence of document on
the document table.
3. ADF timing switch (ADFTIMSW) .................. Detects a paper jam in the ADF section.
4. Paper feed switch (FSW) ............................. Detects a paper jam in the paper feed
section.
5. Eject switch (ESW) ...................................... Detects a paper jam in the fixing
section.
6. Paper size switch (PSSW) ........................... Detects the paper size loaded in the
paper feed tray.
7. Contact image sensor (CIS) ......................... Reads the document image.
8. Toner empty detection sensor (TEDS) ........ Detects the presence of toner in the
imaging unit.
9. Fixing thermistor (TH) .................................. Detects the heat roller surface
temperature.

2-1-2



354

Machine right side

Machine inside

Machine left side

Figure 2-1-3 Layout of electrical parts: solenoid and motors

1. Paper feed solenoid (FSOL) ........................ Controls the paper feed pulley rotation.
2. Main motor (MM) .......................................... Drives the printer section.
3. ADF motor (ADFM) ...................................... Drives the ADF section.
4. Cooling fan motor (FM) ................................ Exhausts heat out of the machine
interior (fixing section).

2-1-3



354

4,5

Machine right side

Machine inside

Machine left side

Figure 2-1-4 Layout of electrical parts: other electrical parts

1. Laser scanning unit (LSU)


Polygon motor (PM) .................................. Drives the polygon mirror.
Laser diode (LD) ........................................ Generates the laser beam.
2. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the
drum surface.
3. Fixing heater (H) .......................................... Heats the heat roller.
4. Fixing thermostat 1 (FTH1) .......................... Prevents overheating in the fixing
section (Breaks the safety circuit of the
fixing heater).
5. Fixing thermostat 2 (FTH2) .......................... Prevents overheating in the fixing
section (Breaks the safety circuit of the
fixing heater).
6. Speaker (SP) ............................................... Generates the alarm sound and
monitors the telephone.

2-1-4

354

2-2-1 Paper jam detection


Paper jams are detected by the on and off timing of the switch equipped with the paper
or document conveying path.
When a paper jam occurs, the error indicator lights up and a message of the paper jam
is displayed on the message display. Also, for printing a PC, the status monitor
indicating the paper jam is displayed on the computer screen too.
When a paper jam occurs, open the machine main body, then remove the jammed
paper. Also, if a document jam occurs, open the ADF cover and remove the jammed
document or press the Stop/Reset key to eject the jammed document.
In order to reset for the paper jam, opening and closing the machine main body (turn off
and on the safety switch).
A document jam is reset by turning on and off the document detection switch (DDSW) or
ADF timing switch (ADFTIMSW).
In order to reset for the document paper jam, open the ADF cover and then remove the
jammed document or press the Stop/Reset key and then eject the jammed document.
When the paper jam detected state is reset, the error indicator goes out and the
message in the message display goes out.

2-2-1

354

2-2-2 Paper jam detection conditions

DDSW

ADFTIMSW
FSOL

FSW

ESW

Figure 2-2-1 Paper jam detection

Power supply on
When the power supply on (power plug is connected or the safety switch turns off/
on), either the paper feed switch (FSW), eject switch (ESW), or ADF timing switch
(ADFTIMSW) turns on.
No paper feed
The paper feed switch (FSW) fails to turn on within 2.0 s after the paper feed
solenoid (FSOL) has turned on.
OFF
FSOL
ON
OFF
FSW
2s

Timing chart 2-2-1

2-2-2

ON

354
Paper feed and conveying sections
The eject switch (ESW) fails to turn on within 4.0 s after the paper feed switch (FSW)
has turned on.
OFF
FSW
ON
OFF
ESW
4s

ON

Timing chart 2-2-2

Fixing and eject sections


The eject switch (ESW) fails to turn off within 11 s after the eject switch (ESW) has
turned on.
OFF
ESW
ON
11 s

Timing chart 2-2-3

Document feed/image reading sections (ADF)


(1) A document longer than the regulation document length (which can be changed
with memory switch No. 51) passed by.
(2) The ADF timing switch (ADFTIMSW) fails to turn on within 10 s after the Copy/
Space key has pressed or the Start key has pressed to scan the document.
Start key or Copy/Space key : ON

OFF
ADFTIMSW
ON
10 s

Timing chart 2-2-4

2-2-3

354

2-3-1 Consists of electric circuit


Network control
unit PCB (NCUPCB)

AC
input

Power source
PCB (PSPCB)
Control PCB
(CPCB)
H
Operation unit
PCB (OPCB)

Contact image
sensor (CIS)

LINE
TEL
FSW
ESW
DDSW
PSSW
ADFTIMSW
TEDS
TH
SP
MM
FSOL
SL
ADFM
FM
High voltage
transformer PCB
(HVTPCB)

Laser scanning
unit (LSU)

Figure 2-3-1 Electric circuit block diagram

The electric circuit of the machine consists of the power source PCB (PSPCB), control
PCB (CPCB), Network control unit PCB (NCUPCB), high voltage transformer PCB
(HVTPCB), operation unit PCB (OPCB), laser scanning unit (LSU), contact image
sensor (CIS), and each load, switch.

2-3-1

354

2-3-2 Power source PCB

24 V DC
AC
input

Noise
filter

Noise
filter

5 V DC
DC power
source

12 V DC
12 V DC

Control PCB
(CPCB)

Fixing heater
control circuit

Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB block diagram

Power source PCB consists of the circuit shown in Figure 2-3-2 and each circuit operates
as follows.
Noise filter
It prevents high-frequency noise peculiar to the switching regulator from escaping out of
the machine via the AC line input and also protects the internal circuits from the adverse
effects of external noise.
DC power source circuit
DC power source circuit rectifies and smoothes the AC input through the noise filter and
generates the 24 V DC, 5 V DC,12 V DC and -12 V DC output that supply to the control
PCB (CPCB) by the switching regulator circuit.
Fixing heater control circuit
Fixing heater control circuit turns on/off the AC voltage that apply to the fixing heater
according to the fixing heater control signal (HREM) from the control PCB (CPCB).

2-3-2

354

2-3-3 Control PCB


DDSW
ADFTIMSW

MODEM IC
(IC300)

SP
Contact
image sensor
(CIS)

CPU1
(IC4)

Operation unit
PCB (OPCB)

High voltage
transformer PCB
(HVTPCB)

ROM
(IC5)
RAM
(IC6,7)

FSW
PSSW
ESW
TEDS
TH
MM
FSOL
FM
CL

Network control
unit PCB
(NCUPCB)

I/O
(IC200)

CPU2
(IC101)

ADFM

Laser scanning
unit (LSU)

Reset circuit
(IC1)

Figure 2-3-3 Control PCB block diagram

Control PCB consists of the circuit shown in Figure 2-3-3.


CPU1 (IC4) on the control PCB inputs the document detection switch (DDSW) and ADF
timing switch (ADFTIMSW) signals, controls the NCU PCB (NCUPCB) and operation
unit PCB (OPCB) input/output, and controls the contact image sensor (CIS) drive
following the program written into the ROM (IC5).
CPU2 (IC101) inputs the paper feed switch (FSW), paper size switch (PSSW), eject
switch (ESW), toner empty detection sensor (TEDS), and fixing thermistor (TH) signals,
controls the main motor (MM), paper feed solenoid (FSOL), and cooling fan (FM) drive,
controls the cleaning lamp (CL) and high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) output,
controls the fixing temperature, controls the laser scanning unit (LSU) drive, detects the
toner presence and paper jams, etc.
I/O (IC200) controls the ADF motor (ADFM) drive.
The image data input from the NCU PCB (NCUPCB) is converted by CPU2 (IC101) with
the laser diode on/off timing and output to the laser scanning unit (LSU) following the
timing signal (MSYNC) from the laser scanning unit (LSU) to receive a fax.
On the other hand, an image scanned in by the contact image sensor (CIS) is input to
CPU1 (IC4), converted to compressed data (MH, MR, MMR) for fax transmission,
modulated by the modem IC (IC300), and transmitted via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB).
The reset circuit (IC1) outputs reset signals to CPU1 and CPU2 when there is a CPU
error, when the power is switched on, and when the power supply voltage drops.

2-3-3

354

2-3-4 NCU PCB (Network control unit PCB)

Pulse dial generation circuit

Control PCB
(CPCB)

Ringing sound detection circuit

Modem IC
(IC300)

Polarity detection circuit

LINE

Line transformer
Analog switch

TEL

External telephone
connection control circuit

Figure 2-3-4 NCUPCB block diagram

NCUPCB consists of the circuit shown in Figure 2-3-4.


The NCU circuit consists of the circuits shown in Figure 2-3-4 and each circuit operates
as follows.
Polarity detection circuit
The polarity detection circuit detects the line polarity and outputs it to the control PCB
(CPCB).
Line transformer
The line transformer forms a closed circuit with the line and inputs/outputs image data.
Analog switch
The analog switch outputs image data from the line to the control PCB (CPCB).
Pulse dial generation circuit
The pulse dial generation circuit outputs dial pulses to the line based on the pulse dial
control signals from the control PCB (CPCB).
Ringing sound detection circuit
The ringing sound detection circuit detects the ringing sound from the line and notifies the
control PCB (CPCB) that there is an incoming call.
External telephone connection control circuit
Controls connections for the external telephone.
The NCU circuit is controlled by the modem IC (IC300) on the control PCB (CPCB).

2-3-4

354

2-3-5 OPCB (Operation unit PCB)

Control PCB
(CPCB)
CPU1
(IC4)

CPU
(IC1)

Keyboard input
circuit

LED lighting circuit


LCD

Figure 2-3-5 OPCB block diagram

OPCB consists of the circuit shown in Figure 2-3-5.


The operation unit circuit consists of the keyboard input circuit, the LED lighting circuit
and the liquid crystal display device LCD. One chip CPU (IC1) controls these three
functions.
CPU (IC1) on the operation unit circuit is a one-chip CPU which has the programmable
I/O terminal and the clock oscillation circuit, and the program stored in CPU controls the
input of the keyboard switch, the lighting of LED and the message display on the LCD
for the operation panel.
The input data from the keyboard and displayed data on LED and LCD are output and
input as serial data which is synchronized with clock input from CPU1 (IC4) of the
control PCB.

2-3-5

354

2-3-6 Communication Procedures


( 1 ) Outline
There are two different procedures available for facsimile transmission, one being used
for communicating between our facsimiles and those of other manufacturers and the
other being used for communication between our facsimiles.
The facsimile machine has two standard modes, the internationally used and recognized G3 standard and our own standard.
In the G3 mode, the facsimile machine automatically responds in the mode the other
machine is using.
Our own standard can be selected and used only if the user selects it. If the other
machine does not use our standard, the facsimile automatically goes into the normal
(G3) mode.

2-3-6

354
( 2 ) Communication Procedures
1. G3 transmission
Originating machine
(ours)

Receiving machine
(other company's)

Dial
CNG

CED

(NSF, CSI) DIS

TSI, DCS

TCF

CFR

PIX,RTC
Next document
(no mode change)

MPS

MCF

PIX,RTC

No document to send

EOP

MCF

DCN
Hung up
(

) Option signals

Figure 2-3-6 G3 procedure (transmission)

2-3-7

354
2. G3 reception
Originating machine
(other company's)

Receiving machine
(ours)

Dial
CNG

CED

NSF, CSI, DIS

(TSI) DCS

TCF

CFR

PIX,RTC
Next document
(mode change)

EOM

MCF

NSF, CSI, DIS

(TSI) DCS

TCF

CFR

PIX, RTC
No document to send

EOP

MCF

DCN
Hung up
(

) Option signals

Figure 2-3-7 G3 procedure (reception)

2-3-8

354
3. G3 procedure between our machines

Originating machine

Receiving machine

Dial
CNG

CED

NSF, CSI, DIS

TSI, NSS

TCF

CFR

PIX,RTC
No document to send

EOP

MCF

DCN
Hung up

Figure 2-3-8 G3 procedure (between our machines)

2-3-9

354
4. Fallback procedure
This facsimile uses two types of fallback procedures, TCF and image signal. The actual
training is a task performed by the modem and the fallback procedure is based on that
task.
1) TCF (Training check) fallback
When the FTT response is received by the same speed TCF, the communication speed
is lowered and the TCF is transmitted. However, receiving FTT at a 2400 bps TCF will
result in a communication error and the facsimile transaction will abort.
Originating machine
(ours)

Receiving machine

CED

NSF, CSI, DIS

TSI, NSS
9600 bps

TCF

FTT

Training result bad

TSI, NSS

7200 bps

TCF

CFR

Training result good

PIX

Figure 2-3-9 TCF fallback procedure

2-3-10

354
Fallback from the transmission start speed occurs in the following manner upon FTT
reception (unit: bps):
TC14400 TC12000 TC9600 TC7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted
14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted (When the
destination unit has no V. 17)
TC12000 TC9600 TC7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted
12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted (When the destination unit
has no V. 17)
TC9600 TC7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted
TC7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted
9600 7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted (Only down to 7200 if the destination
unit has V.29 only)
7200 4800 2400 DCN emitted (No fallback occurs if the destination unit has
V.29 only)
4800 2400 DCN emitted
2400 DCN emitted
Destination units receiving capacity and transmission start speed
Transmission start speed
Destination
unit's
receiving
capacity

TC14400

TC12000

TC9600

TC7200

9600 7200 4800 2400

V.17,
V.33,
V.29,
V.27 ter

TC14400

TC12000

TC9600

TC7200

9600 7200 4800 2400

V.33,
V.29,
V.27 ter

14400

12000

9600

7200

9600 7200 4800 2400

V.29,
V.27 ter

9600

9600

9600

7200

9600 7200 4800 2400

V.27 ter

4800

4800

4800

4800

4800 4800 4800 2400

V.29
only

9600

9600

9600

7200

9600 7200 See See


Note Note

V.27 ter/
2400bps

2400

2400

2400

2400

2400 2400 2400 2400

Note: The DCN signal is transmitted upon reception of DIS (NSF) or DTC (NSC) to
finish communication.

2-3-11

354
2) Image signal fallback
When an RTN (Retraining Negative) is received in response to the image signal, the
speed is temporarily lowered. However if the speed cannot be lowered any further then,
at that speed, the TCF fallback procedure will take place.
Originating machine
(ours)

9600 bps

Next document

Receiving machine

PIX, RTC

MPS

More than 15% of the total lines


are error lines (it is possible to
change in memory switch No.34
in service mode)

RTN

TSI, NSS

7200 bps

TCF

CFR

PIX

Figure 2-3-10 Image signal fallback procedure

2-3-12

354
5. Aborting communications (Reset/Eject key)
Communications may be aborted by pressing the Reset/Eject key during facsimile
transmission. Figure 2-3-11 shows the procedure.
1) G3 procedure
Originating machine
Reset/Eject key ON

Receiving machine

PIX
MSEG, RTC

EOP

MCF

DCN
Alarm

Figure 2-3-11 G3 mode aborting procedure (transmission)

2-3-13

354
6. Mode change
In the G3 mode, the image quality can be changed during scanning, the change takes
place immediately after the EOM and the current page is sent. Also, the transmission/
reception mode can changed after all the pages have been sent to the other machine by
sending the EOM, giving it the new transmission parameters.
Originating machine

Receiving machine
CNG

Image quality setting: Normal

CED
(NSF, CSI) DIS
TSI, DCS
TCF

3.85 l/mm
Image quality setting: Fine

CFR
PIX,RTC
EOM
MCF
T2
(NSF, CSI) DIS
TSI, DCS
TCF
CFR

7.7 l/mm

PIX, RTC
MPS
MCF

No document to send

PIX, RTC
EOP
MCF
DCN
(

Figure 2-3-12 G3 mode change

2-3-14

) Option signals

E
354

Timing chart No. 1 From the power supply being turned on to machine stabilization

Auto shutoff function: ON

Power supply: ON

Initial stabilization control ends


(Ready mode)

Secondary stabilization
temperature
(180C/356F) detection
(Stabilization ends)

Primary stabilization
temperature
(150C/302F) detection

181C/358F
180C/356F
179C/354F
161C/322F
160C/320F
159C/318F

150C/302F

Fixing thermistor
detection temperature

H REM
(CN1-7)
MM
OFF
(CN6-1
Forward
6-6)
Reverse
MC/DB1 REM
(CN4-2)
DB CHG1
(CN4-4)
DB CHG2
(CN4-5)
CL
(CN5-4)
FM
(CN14-2)

15 s

0.5 s
*2

2 min

*3

0.6 s *1

1.5 s
0.2 s

5 min

OFF
Half speed
Full speed

1s

*1: The main motor (MM) starts rotating at minimum speed, its speed increases in steps, and after about 0.6 s, it reaches full speed
(the specified rotation rate).
*2: The main motor (MM) rotates in reverse about two rotations.
*3: If there is no operation (printing, key operation, or the like) within five minutes after stable ending, the auto shutoff function is triggered
and the machine goes into power saving mode.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J

3-7-1
E

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

E
354

Timing chart No. 2 2-sheet consecutive printing


D

Input

Output

M. SYNC: OFF

ESW: OFF

V. SYNC: OFF

FSW: OFF

V. SYNC: ON

FSW: ON

V. SYNC: OFF

Print start request


signal
Vertical synchronous
signal
(V. SYNC)
M. SYNC
(CN7-2)
FSW
(CN17-2)
ESW
(CN2-3)
PM
(CN7-3)
VIDEO
(CN7-10)
MM
OFF
(CN6-1~6-6)
15 s
Forward
Reverse
0.6 s *1
FSOL
(CN5-1)
MC/DB1 REM
(CN4-2)
DB CHG1
(CN4-4)
1.5 s
DB CHG2
(CN4-5)
0.2 s
CL
(CN5-4)
TC REM
(CN4-3)
H REM
(CN1-7)
FM
OFF
(CN14-2)
Half speed
Full speed

FSW: OFF

V. SYNC: ON

FSW: ON

Print start request signal: ON


M. SYNC: ON

Exit form the preheat


(energy saving) mode
(auto shutoff function: OFF)
Primary stabilization
temperature (150C/302F)
detection
Secondary stabilization
temperature (180C/356F)
detection

Less than 0.5 s

*3
0.5 s

0.7 s

0.7 s

0.5 s
3

1s

0.5 s

0.5 s
4s
*2

0.6 s *1
3s

*2
3s

3s
0.5 s

1.5 s
6

0.2 s

1s

1s

1s

1s
7

5 min
5 min

*1: The main motor (MM) starts rotating at minimum speed, its speed increases in steps, and after about 0.6 second, it reaches full speed
(the prescribed rotation rate).
*2: The motor shaft rotates in reverse about two rotations.
*3: If the error check is made and no error is detected, the print start request signal comes on.

3-7-2
E

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

E
354

Power source PCB


A

L1

1
R19

D10

+
R14

C14

16

D1

+
1

D2

+24 V

+
R29

R18

C16

CN1-1

R37

D9

F.B.

C19

C33

C20
CN1-3

PG

R20
R24

+
C4

C44

R2

D12

NC

C35

R21

D5

L5

D7
10

R30

D4

+12 V
CN1-8

D11

F.B.

R3
C39

R15

R16

14

D3

CN1-2

11

C15

C32

C22

L2

D8

CN1-4
Z2

F3

D14

15

TH1

L4

CN1-5

R34

+
C17

C3

+
R17

R9

R5

C11

NC

C25

C22

C13

C43

C12

C34

C21

CN1-7

NC

R23

+
C18

13

R1

+5 V

CN1-6

C5

C35

R7

12

D4

C6
R33

SG

F.B.

C1

C36

C27

C23

C28

Q1

3
F4

5
R10
9

C7
U1
C8

12 V

D13
3

CN1-9

L5

C2

R11
VR1

C45

R8

GND

R34

C3

R4

C10

R6

NOV1

R12

L7
4

+5 V
R26
U2

C30
H LIVE
F2

F1

2
CN1-10

H NEUTRAL

CN3-1
AC LIVE

R29

CN6-1

R28

TH2

CN5-1

R27

H REM

C26

CN4-1

CN2-1
AC NEUTRAL

GND

3-7-3
E

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

E
354

HVT (High voltage transformer) PCB


A

B1

24VR CN1-1

Q2

R1
+

Q3

R2

R4

C1

R8

Q1

D2

R10

R11

R5
R6

R3
MC/DB1 REM CN1-2

CB2 RB1

IC1

R12

D1

DB2

C3

R7
PG CN1-7

R13

VR1

C4

D5

R26

D12

D4

D13

R25 R16

R19

R45

C10
R41

D8

R21

CN2 DB2

D6

R27

Q8

C12
Q5

Q11

Q7

D14

C8

D9
R44

D16
Q9

R34

Q17
R42

PC2

Q12

VR4

R30

R17 VR3
DB CHG2 CN1-5

R25

R31

R32 R28

Q18

LEAK CN1-6

C5

D15

C11

D10

D11

R43

C9

Q14
Q15

VR2

D16
R18

CN4 DB1

R22

D3

MC

RB2
CB1

DB1

R9
C2

R14

Q10
Q13
C7

D7

PC1

DB CHG1 CN1-4
R15

FG
D56

B51

L1

R59

L2

L3

L4
CN5 TC

R51

D58

C55

TC REM CN1-3

D51

D52

C56

Q51

R52 C51
R54

C57

R60

D57

R53
R55
C52

D54

7
R56
VR81

VR51

C53

R57

D55

R81

C54

C81
D81

D53

Q81

Q82

CN6 GRID
Z81

C82

3-7-4
E

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Control PCB 1/7


A

CLK_16M
/MODEMCS0

/MODEM_DREQ
/RAMOE0
/RAMOE1
/RAMWE0
/RAMWE1
RDY
DMAINT
ACCINT

2
UNIT MAIN(FAX CONTROLER_CA)

UNIT MAIN(CPU)
A(0-23)

/MODEM_DREQ

OPT_INT

A(0-23)

ACCINT

D(0-7)

DMAINT

/RD

OPT_INT

/WR

/DLYRESET

/OFFHOOK

ONHOOK2

/TYLSEL

/OFFHOOK

/PLSDIL
/KMUTE
/EARTH

/RAMOE1
/RAMOE0

BUZZER

/RXSEL

/TELSEL

/DLYRESET

/TYLSEL

CLK_32M

CBSY0
PRREQ0
COMMAND0
VSYNC0
SCCLK0

CBSY0
PRREQ0
COMMAND0
VSYNC0
SCCLK0

STATUS0
SBSY0

STATUS0
SBSY0

/PLSDIL

CLK_32M

/KMUTE

CLK_16M

/EARTH

/HSYNC_OUT
VDO0
SFTCLK
NEWLINE

/HSYNC_OUT
VDO0
SFTCLK
NEWLINE

BUZZER

VOL0

/RXSEL

/OPT_MEM1

/OPT_MEN2

/OPT_MEN1

MONITOR

/OPT_MEN2

VOL0

/OFFHOOK

/OFFHOOK

MONITOR
VOL0

VOL1

VOL1

/OPT_MEM2

BUZZER

VOL0

/DLYRESET

/DLYRESET

VOL1
LED_ON
SBSY0
VSREQ0
READY0

SBSY0
VSREQ0
READY0

JP002

+24 V

MAIN UNIT(RS232C)

/KMUTE

3
ONHOOK2

VOL1

LED_ON

ONHOOK2

BUZZER

MONITOR

/OPT_MEM2

/PLSDIL

/RNGDET

ONHOOK1

/RXSEL

/KMUTE
/OPT_MEM1

ONHOOK1

/EARTH

/RXSEL

/PLSDIL

/EARTH

/TELSEL

MONITOR

/OPT_MEN1

/RAMWE1
/RAMWE0

/MPOEMCS0
/RNGDET

/MODEMCS0

ONHOOK1

ONHOOK2

/MPOEM_DREQ

/WR

/RAMWE1
/RAMWE0
/RAMOE1
/RAMOE0

/RNGDET

ONHOOK1

D(0-7)
/DLYRD

/WR

RDY

A(0-23)

RDY

/IOCS

/DLYRESET

/RNGDET

ACCINT
DMAINT

/RD

/DLYRD

/IOCS
CLK_16M

D(0-7)

/RD
/WR

/DLYRD

A(0-23)

D(0-7)

UNIT MAIN(MODEM)

MAIN UNIT(ENGINE CONTROLER)


CBSY0
COMMAND0
STATUS0
SCCLK0
SBSY0

CBSY0
COMMAND0
STATUS0
SCCLK0
SBSY0

READY0
VSREQ0
VSYNC0
PRREQ0

READY0
VSREQ0
VSYNC0
PRREQ0

SFTCLK
VDO0
NEWLINE

SFTCLK
VDO0
NEWLINE

CLK_32M

EA(8-15)
ED(0-7)
ASB
/EWR
/ERD
VIDEO_CK
VDO1
ENCODE
H_STROBE
GDLINT

MAIN UNIT(GDI CONTROLER)


EA(8-15)
ED(0-7)
ASB
/EWR
/ERD
VIDEO_CK
VDO1
ENCODE
H_STROBE
GDI_INT

D(0-7)
A(0-3)

EA(8-15)
/WR

ED(0-7)

/IOCS
ASB
/EWR
/ERD

CLK_16M
OPT_INT

VIDEO_CK
VDO1
ENCODE
H_STROBE

/WR
/DLYRD
/IOCS

CN1
24 V
PG
+5 V
SG
+12 V
12 V
H REM

CLK_16M
OPT_INT
/DLYRESET

+
C003

C001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

JP005
R001

GDI_INT

+12 V
12 V

CLK_32M

/HSYNC_OUT
GDICLK16M

/HSYNC_OUT

LED_ON

LED_ON
/HSYNC_OUT

GDICLK16M

JP004

C002

TP001

GDICLK16M

+
C007

+
C006

C005

C004

/DLYRESET
AG

/HEATER REM
/DLYRESET

/DLYRESET

AG

AG

AG

DG

DG

FG

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Control PCB 2/7


A

+5 V

C1

R2

IC2C

IC2D

11

10

NC
CON

8
5

BUZZER

/DLYRESET

/DLYRESET(3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18

VBAT
IC4
CLK 16M

78
79

DLTRESET

127

+5 V

IC2F
12

/VDOWN

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

IC3
4

13

PF6
+5 V

DG

/MODEM_DREQ

/NM1

DG

C8
DG

DG

159
ACCINT
DPT INT
DMAINT

IC9A
4

RXSELL

ACCINT(4)
OPT_INT(7)
DMAINT(4)

DG

+5 V
R51

R6

IC9C
3

/RNGDET
R5

R7

R8

DG

DG

+5 V
R22

+5 V

+5 V

R23

R24

+5 V

R25

R26

PRDY(2)

ONHOOK1
ONHOOK2
RL
/PRDY

HRDY(2)

/S2
/S1
/HRDY

R27
R28

IA13
IA12

DDSW

IC11
IA0
IA1
IA2
IA3
IA4
IA5
IA6
IA7
IA8
IA9
IA10
IA12
IA13

ONHOOK2(5)
ONHOOK1(5)
/OFFHOOK(5)

+5 V

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2

IA10
IA9
IA8
IA7
IA6
IA5
IA4
IA3
IA2
IA1
IA0

19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11

+5 V
VCC 28

CS1
CS2
WE
OE

C11

GND 14
DG

VR1

R29

R32
C12

C14
3 +
2

R31

SIG

TP1

AG

R33

VBAT

D2

SI

DG

C16
C17

CIS CLK

AG

R34

DG

C15

D1

-12 V

RDYIN
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0

90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97

PE7
PE6
PE5
PE4
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0

AG
R36

TP2

A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
RU
WR
ROMCS
RAMCS
IOCS
LCS0
LCS1

IA13
IA12
IA11
IA10
IA9
IA8
IA7
IA6
IA5
IA4
IA3
IA2
IA1
IA0

PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0

ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
ICS
IRD
IWR
SH
RS
ACLK1
ACLK2
ASAMP

A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
29
3
2
30
31

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18

22
24

CE
OE

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

+5 V

VPP
VCC

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14

20
22
27

CS
OE
WE

1
32
VBAT

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11

AIN
TEMP
ATAP
AVDD
AVSS
BACKUP
MSEL

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14

VBAT

IC7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1

28
20
22
27

C38
14

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11

98
99
102

VSS

16

C6
VSS 14
DG

DG

R4

3
+5VGAE

/RAMOE0

/RAMOE0(4)

/RAMOE1

/RAMOE1(4)
1

IC8A

/RAMWE0

/RAMWE0(4)

7
2

/RAMWE1

/RAMWE1(4)
4
DG

/RD
/WR
/ROMCS
/IOCS(7)
/MODEMCS0(5)
R47

R10

VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS

1
21
41
61
81
101
121
141

R48

R49

R50

EARTHL

R18

KMUTEL

R19

PLSDILL

R20

/PLSDIL

TELSELL R21

/TELSEL

/EARTH

+5 V
/OPT_MEM1(4)
/OPT_MEM2(4)

SW1
5
4
3
2
1

+5 V

6
7
8
9
10

/KMUTE

R17

RXSELL

/RXSEL

R52

TO MODEM CIRSUIT

PF6
PF5
LED ON
EARTHL
KMUTEL
PLSDILL
TELSELL

+5 V
6

R11

R15
DG

ADFTMSW
+5 V

DG
R55
TXD
SCLK OP
RXD
/HRDY
/PRDY

C22
R40

DDSW

2
IC9B

R16
R12
R14
R13

VBAT

X1

/OP_RES
C33

R41

DG
VBAT

/EARTH(5)
/KMUTE(5)
/PLSDIL(5)
/TELSEL(5)

/RXSEL(5)
CN11
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DDSW
SG
5V
ADF TIMSW
SG
5V
5V
SG
SI
KCLK
SO
HSREN
RSREN
RESET

C37
DG

C23
DG

/DLYRD(5, 7)
/RD(4)
/WR(4, 5, 7)

+5 V

/RAMCS
/IOCS
/MODEMCS0

59
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160

VBAT

C7

58

VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

DG

R9
50
51 /OT MEM1
52 /OPT MEM2
53
KUN14
KUN13
54
KUN12
55
KUN11
56
KUN10
57

TXD
SCLK
RXD

VCC 28

CS
OE
WE

/DLYRD
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

143
142
107
103
104
105
106
108
109

ROSC2

DG

C20

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
HVON
PROTECT

ROSC1

C18
/DLYRESET 158
9

152
153
154
155

IC6

+5 V
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4

156
157 TEST1
TEST0

DG
+5 V

125

126

+5 V
AG

+24 V

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

122

A19
A18
A17
A16

EMU

PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0

123
124

+5 V
-12 V

R35

6
IC10

A23
A22
A21
A20

PH12
RES
R/W
IRQ
VP
RDY
BE
VPA
VDA
NMI

84
85
86
87
88
89

128
129
118
119
130

C13

CN15
SIG
1
SG
2
5V
3
-12 V
4
SG
5
SI
6
SG
7
CLK
8
LED REM
9
24 V
10

RESET

INT0
INT15
INT16
INT17

133
134
135
136
137
138
139
144
145
146
147
148
149
150

PD3
SPCLK
BACK
BREQ

CLKIN
CLKOUT

10
11
83
82

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
151
131
132

R30

AG

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12

20
26
27
22

+12 V

SBSY0
VSREQ0
BEADY0

SBSY0(3)
VSREQ0(3)
READY0(3)

ADFTIMSW

RDY

RDY(4)

DG

C9
DG

/UFFHOOK
MONITOR
VOL1
VOL0

MONITOR(5)
VOL1(5)
VOL0(5)

D(0-7)

IC5

VBAT

DG

BUZZER(5)
A(0-23)

D10..71

CLK_16M(4)

/RNGDET(5)

DG

VBAT

/MODEM_DREQ(5)

C5
DG

DG

C3

DG

DLYRESET

A10..231
OUT

C2

IC2E
R3

C4

R1

IC1
VCC
NC
NC
NC
CND

7
1
2
3
4

IC2B

IC2A

+5 V

DG
C34

DG
C35

DG
C36
DG

+5 V
1

Q2

L1
D3

C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32


R42

DG

R43

Z101

D4
R45

Q3

DG

R46

R37
DG

DG

DG

C21
DG
Q1

R38
C19

LED_ON

R39
LED_ON(3)
DG

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Control PCB 3/7


A
+5 V

+5 V_SW
2

SD10..71

ASB (6)
/EWR (6)
/ERD (6)

SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0

2
L112
DG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SBSY0

SBSY0 (2, 4)
+5 V
+5 V +5 V
SG
FSW
5V
5V
SG
PSSW

R100

CN17

R104

R102

1
2
3
4
5
6

47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

FUTMP
TNS

FUTMP (3)
TNS (3)
PSSW
C101

READY0
VSREO0

READY0 (2)
VSREO0 (2)

3
DG

36
37
38
39
45

INT1
GDI_INT
/HSYNC

GDI_INT (6)
FSW
R105

41
42

+5 V
+5 V

CN2
1
2
3

35

/DLYRESET

R101
ESW

44

P50/A8
P51/A9
P52/A10
P53/A11
P54/A12
P55/A13
P56/A14
P57/A15

P10/AN10
P11/AN11
P12/AN12
P13/AN13
P14/AN14
P15/AN15
P16/AN16
P17/AN17

P60
P61
P62
P63
P64/RD
P65/WR
P66/WAIT
P67/ASTB

P00/IN T0/T10
P01/IN TP1
P02/IN TP2
P03/IN TP3
P04/XT1

ED0
ED1
ED2
ED3
ED4
ED5
ED6
ED7

18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26

EA8
EA9
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
EA15

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

S5 V
LEAK

IC105A

DG

9
24
43

VSS
VSS
VSS

C106

DG
C108

L101

R111

GDICLK16M

GDICLK16M (6)

IC5C
T

DG

2
4
/DLYRESET 141
10
WAIT

/DLYRESET (2)

+5 V
TEDS
SG

1
2
3

R112

VIDEO_CK

VIDEO_CK (6)

VDO1 (6)

ENCODE
H STROBE

ENCODE (6)
H_STROBE (6)
R107
R108

TEDS

LMST
PTM
LPSC
FOLOCK

PRREQ1
VSYNC1
VDO1
VIDEO_CK
ENCODE
H_STROBE
PCL5/GDI
N_VCLK0

TNS

TSM
TNSC_CK
PSC
FANH
FANL
GRID
HVTC
HVCC
FPLOCK
TPC
EXPC_CK
AVRERR
EXP
MRL
SSR
PRC
MMLOCK
MMSI

DG
C102

C103
+24 V

+5 V

S5 V

DG
DG
+5 V

R110

TH

R132

R133

IC106

C141

+24 V

C139 C140

9
R126

7
12

C137

DG

+5 V
R130

R127

3
14

R128

R131

DG

+
C136

C142

10
C134

C135

INA
INA
INB
INB

MMA
MMA
MMB
MMB

C111

54

90

73

61

126

109

C114

C115
+24 V

144

C116

C117

C118

C119

C120

REFB
GNDA
GNDB

RSB

C132

4
15

DG

C133

R125

C121

/VIDEO

VCC
CS1
CS2
WE
OE

28
DG

C124
GND

MCLK
MSYNC
MSTART
PG
24 V
HSYNC
5V
SG
LD
VIDEO
VR

14

DG
DG

S5 V

DG

R113

IC103A
1
2

74
77
76
92
78
80
75

/LDEN
IC103B
3
4
+5 V

IC104A
1

/HSYNC

63
64
65
66
79
57
58
59
60

2
R114

R115
R116

C126

C127
S5 V
DG

MMA
MMB
MMA
MMB

99
98
107
84

DG
D100B

R118

R117

D100A

C128

7
5
106
83
85
103
102
101
86
104
6
89
8
97
100
105
93
87

DG

DG

S5 V

/LDEN

IC103C
6

+24 V

R119
L109
2
IC107A

L104
2

1
CN5

FSOL REM

FSOL REM
24 V
24 V
CL REM

1
2
3
4

CL REM

113

C129

L105
1

Q103

+24 V

C122
L110
2

DG
IC107B

L106

C123
IC104E
10

H REM

1
2

FM REM

DG

24 V
FM REM

C130

11

IC104B
MC/DB REM

R136

TC REM

R137

DB CHG1

R139

DG
IC104D

DG

+5 V
R124

2
13

/H.SYNC

R122

C113 - C121
H REM (1)

TDA
TDB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

CN14

C112

C131

RETA

CN7

/M.CLK
/M.SYNC
/M.START

R123

DG

VSA
VSB

DG

SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0

+5 V

X100
37

RSA

R129
DG

6
5
17
16

19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11

DG

L102
18

C138

TEST1

C113

OUTA
OUTA
OUTB
OUTB

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

DG
2

8
1
18
11

20
26
27
22

81
82
71
67
68
69
70

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12

+5 V

DG

+24 V

1
2
3
4
5
6

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2

SA0
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12

111
112

51
52

DG

DG

127
118
108
91
72
62
55
50
36
19
3
1

DG

PORT1
PORT2

144
126
109
90
73
61
54
37
18

CN6

DOTCLK0
DOTCLK1

123
110

VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS

C105

DG
MMA
MMA
24 V
24 V
MMB
MMB

DG

FUTMP

C104

DG

53
56

VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC

1
2

O104

R109

CN18

CIINT
PANELINT
INT16CLR

SXIN
SXOUT

TH
SG

94
95
96

D105

138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
125
124

+5 V

SMRA
SMRB
SMRA
SMRB
MRM
SDHMA
SDHMB
SDHMA
SDHMB

32MHZ
16MHZ
RESET
WAIT

47
48
45
46
43
44
40
41

VDO1

IC101

C125

2 2

+5 V
CN3

LD
ENB
S/H
LSUCLK
SMON
SMLOCK
HSYNC

VDO0
SF TCLK
NEW LINE
VSYNC0
PRREQ0
/HSYNC_OUT

CLK 32M

CLK_32M (4)

DG
DG

ADFM0
ADFM1
ADFM2
ADFM3

32
VDO0
39
SFTCLK
38
NEW LINE
42
VSYNC0
33
PRREQ0
/HSYNC OUT 49

VDO0 (4)
SF TCLK (4)
NEW LINE (4)
VSYNC0 (4)
PRREQ0 (4)
/HSYNC_OUT (4, 6)

CLK_8M
CLK_8M
INT1
INT16

139
140
142
143

C107

46

AVSS

WF
OE
FUOVH
FUTHOPN
SDHOPN
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4

RD
WR
ASB

S5 V
IC102

SA0
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12

EA8
EA9
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
EA15

34
35
9
88

INT1

RESET
XT2

31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24

ED0
ED1
ED2
ED3
ED4
ED5
ED6
ED7

C109

55
56

AVDD
AVREF

+5 V

CLK_8M

+5 V

L100

IC105B
6

EA8
EA9
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
EA15

CLK 8M
2

AG

+5 V

23
22
21
20
17
16
15
14

12
11
13

40

VDD

X2
X1

ED0
ED1
ED2
ED3
ED4
ED5
ED6
ED7

/ERD
/EWR
WAIT
ASB

R106

C101

P30/TO0
P31/TO1
P32/TO2
P33/T11
P34/T12
P35/PCL
P36/BUZ
P37

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

5V
SG
ESW

P40/AD0
P41/AD1
P42/AD2
P43/AD3
P44/AD4
P45/AD5
P46/AD6
P47/AD7

SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0

CBSY0
COMMAND0
STATUS0
SCCLK0

P20/S11
P21/SO1
P22/SCK1
P23/STB
P24/BUSY
P25/SS10/SB0
P26/SO0/SB1
P27/SCK0

114
115
116
117
119
120
121
122

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

R103
CBSY0 (4)
COMMAND0 (4)
STATUS0 (4)
SCCLK0 (4)

+24 V

IC100

+5 V

DG_SW

ED10..71

ED (0-7)

L111

EA18..151

EA (8-15)

R120

R121

CN4
24 V
MC/DB REM
TC REM
DB CHG1
DB CHG2
LEAK
PG

IC104F

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

13

IC107C

L107
2

11

14

IC104C
R138

DB CHG2

+5 V
R141
R140

DG

LEAK
LED_ON (2)

C143

DG

DG

12

LED_ON

IC107D

L108
2

16

DG

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Control PCB 4/7


A

B
CN13

ADFMA
ADFMA
24 V
24 V
ADFMB
ADFMB

1
C227

C230

C228

+24 V

IC208

8
1
18
11

C229

R212

+5 V
R215

DG

7
12

C226

R213

3
14

R216

INA
INA
INB
INB

OUTA
OUTA
OUTB
OUTB

ADFM0
ADFM2
ADFM1
ADFM3

6
5
17
16

IC201
MA0
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MA5
MA6
MA7
MA8
MA9

+5 V
RSA
VSA
VSB
REFA

TDA
TDB

R210

2
13

REFB

9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
5
4
23
3
22

R211

R214

+ C223

C224

C221

C225

C231

10

DG

RSB

GNDA
GNDB

C222

4
15

DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

VCC

RAS
CAS
WE
OE

VSS

MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3

1
2
24
25

13

DG
DG
DG

DG

DG
IC202

DG

MA0
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MA5
MA6
MA7
MA8
MA9

ADFM10..31
MA10..91
ACCINT (2)
DMAINT (2)
RDY (2)

ACCINT
DMAINT
RDY

MD10..71

/HSYNC OUT (3)

84
82
69

/HSYNC OUT

141
3
143
140
79
80
81

SERVICE

R204

31

MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0

106

ICAS
IRAS0
IRAS1
IRAS2
XCAS
XRAS0
XRAS1

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23

DWR
DOE

MM0
MM1
MM2
MM3
LSUCLK
LDPWM0
LDPWM1
VIDEO
SMON
DOTSFT
LDON
EXTDEC
NEWLINE
PSSU
PSSL

RD
WR
EXTRDY

HVM
BIAS
HVTI
HVTP

IC200

DLYRESET

HVEN

OPTCSL
PEL
PEU
TNFUL
TNEMP

MMEN
FM
SSR

JAM2
JAM1

CLK_32M
DOTCLK

SAF

CLK_16M

HSINC
PD
SMLOCK

/ICAS

132
133
134

/IRAS0
/IRAS1
/IRAS2

137

/XCAS

138
139

/XRAS0
/XRAS1

130
2

/DWR
/DOE

88
105
104

VCC

RAS
CAS
WE
OE

VSS

MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7

1
2
24
25

3
13

+5 V
C216

26

DG

4
CN16

R219
/DOE
R220
/ICAS
/IRAS2 R221
/XRAS0 R222

VDO0
L203

/OPT_MEM1 (2)
VDO0 (3)

IC205C

+5 V

9
8

NEWLINE (3)

CBSY0

SFTCLK

SFTCLK (3)

10

/HSYNC OUT
NEWLINE

CBSY0 (3)

2
L201

CLK_32M

CLK_32M (3)

MD0
MD2
MD4
MD6

R205

117
111
91
107

PRREO0
SCCLK0

115

VSYNC0

PRREO0 (3)
SCCLK0 (3)

COMMAND0

CAMPON

C214

DG

DG

DG

CLK_16M

CLK_16M (2, 7)

+5 V GAE

33
IC8B
5

34
1

35

L202

R207

R208

+5 V GAE

6
IC205B

IC205A

3
C213

DG

38

IN16MHZ

85
39

+5VGAE
DG

DG

142

VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

IC207

DG

IC205D

2
12

136
127
118
108
100
83
72
65
55
36
30
1

141
131
109
90
73
37
18
12

DG

DG

DG

89

SXOUT

R203

MD1
MD3
MD5
MD7

116
78

DG
32

+5 V

R206

VSYNC0 (3)

DG
IN16MHZ

/DWR
/IRAS1
/XCAS
/XRAS1
/OPT_MEM2 (2)

C220

14
1

SXIN

MA1
MA3
MA5
MA7
MA9
R223
R224
R225
R226

COMMAND0 (3)

C212

INP
CSL
CSU

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40

C219

R202

C202

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39

MA0
MA2
MA4
MA6
MA8

110
112
113
114
71
74
77
76
70
75
86
87

DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

R209

TESTOUT
TEST
X200

4
23
3
22

135

ENCODEI
START
CLK
CCDDT

C201
DG

9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
5

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

92
93

STATUS0
SBSY0

MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0

DG
STATUS0 (3)
SBSY0 (3)

MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0

129
128
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119

101
94
95
102
103

C200

ADFM3
ADFM2
ADFM1
ADFM0

56

/DLYRESET

ACCINTO
DMAINTO

/RD (2)
/WR (2)

/DLYRESET (2)

53
54
40

96
97
98
99

R201

67
66

R200
/RD
/WR

MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0

ADFM3
ADFM2
ADFM1
ADFM0

+5 V GAE

RDY

/RAMWE1
/RAMWE0

13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

RAMOE1
RAMOE0

/RAMOE1
/RAMOE0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

68

/RAMOE1 (2)
/RAMOE0 (2)
/RAMWE1 (2)
/RAMWE0 (2)

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

RAMWE1
RAMWE0

A10..231

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

41
42

A (0-23)

D10..71

43
44

D (0-7)

+5 V
C215

26

R217

DG

+24 V

1
2
3
4
5
6

11

13

C211
3

+5 V GAE

+5 V GAE

DG

DG

DG

DG

C204
144

131

C206
109

90

C208
73

37

2
18

L200

+5 V

12
C210

DG
C203

C205

C207

C209
DG

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Control PCB 5/7


A

C105
X300

R324
IC300

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

43
49
50
45
51
42
44
54
48
47
46
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

SCCLK
EOS
BOS
RDYS
SCOUT
SCIN
MC1
CLKOUT
MC0
MC1
MC2
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

17
18
19
20
21
22
23

SA0
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6

DG
D(0-7)

D(0-7)

2
A(0-6)

A(0-6)

+5 V

R300

/MODEM_DREQ(2)

/MODEM_DREQ
/MODEMCS0(2)
/WR(2)
/DLYRD(2)
/DLYRESET(2)

+5 V

/MODEMCS0
/WR
/DLYRD

37
38
36
35
34
39

/DLYRESET

52

RESET

9
25
41

DVDD
DVDD
DVDD

SDTACK
SINTR
SCS
SR/W
SDS
INT/MOT

EXTAL
XTAL
HALT/NOP
TXA1
TXA2

+5 V

56
55
53

R322
DG

2
1
60
61

AVDD
VREFP

62
58

VCM

63

VREFN
AGNDR
AGNDT
EYEX
EYEY
TEST2
TEST1

57
59
64
7
6
4
5

TXD
CLK
RXD
CD
RTS
CTS
RING

16
14
15
13
11
12
10

EBS

C307

R323

MODRXD

R319

C309

AG

AG

EYEX
EYEY

C310

+12 V
+

R330

C311

C320

C316

C314

+5 V

AG
C317

C321

R318
8

6
5+

2
3 +

7
R316

IC302B

R317

R313

MODTXD

1
IC302A
LA6458M

C322

R314

AG
R332

AG
VR300

R312

C315

C318

R331

R315
C319

C312 C313
8
24
40

DG
DG
DG
C302 C303 C304

R321

+ 5

R320

C308
R325

DG

DG
DG
C300
C301

IC301B

C199

AVCC

RXIN

RXA1
RXA2

DGND
DGND
DGND

C306

R333

AG

AG

AG

12 V
+12 V
C334

+5 V

AVCC
BUZZER(2)

R302

RXIN_N

R303

12
13
2
1

R304
C327

CN10

MODRXD

ONHOOK1
1
ONHOOK2
2
TELSEL
3
PLSDIL
4
MODRXD
5
RXSEL
6
MODTXD
7
EARTH
8
KMUTE
9
RNGDET
10
OFFHOOK
11
RXINN
12
+12 V
13
+12 V
14
AG
15
AG
16
12 V
17
12 V
18
+5 V
19
+5 V
20
SG
21
SG
22
DF11 22DP 2DSA

MODRTD

+12 V
12 V
AVCC
C323

/TELSEL
/PLSDIL
/KMUTE
/EARTH
/RNGDET(2)
ONHOOK1(2)

/TELSEL(2)
/PLSDIL(2)
/KMUTE(2)
/EARTH(2)
/RXSEL(2)

C324
AG

C325
AG

AG

/RNGDET
ONHOOK1
/RXSEL
RXIN_N

ONHOOK2(2)
/OFFHOOK(2)

ONHOOK2

AG

MONITOR(2)
VOL0(2)
VOL1(2)

MONITOR
VOL0
VOL1

AG

C326

IC303
X0
X1
Y0
Y1

5 Z0
3 Z1
6 INH
11 A
10 B
9 C

AG

AVCC

BUZZER

R305

14

15

VDD

16

VSS

VEE

IC304

C335

R306

1 8

R307
C176

AVCC

+
C332

R308

C329

<SP>

AG
CN12

C331

1
2

SP
SG

C330

R310

R311

AG

AG

AG

C328

AG 12 V

AG

6 4
3+
5
2

R309

AG

DG

/OFFHOOK

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Control PCB 6/7


A

+5 V

+5 V

1
2

10 5
2

+5 V
+5 V

+5 V

R405 R406 R407 R408 R409

2
IC401B
4

C407
R402

IC401F

/INTCLR

12

ED0
ED1
ED2
ED3
ED4
ED5
ED6
ED7

140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133

PA0/NSAF
PA1
PA2/LM2
PA3/LM1
PA4/LM0
PA5/TM2
PA6/TM1
PA7/TM0
PA8
PA9
PA10
PA11
PA12
PA13
PA14
PA15

12
107

ENCODE(3)
H_STROBE(3)
VIDEO_CK(3)
VDO1(3)
/HSYNC_OUT(3)

14
15
16
17
2

R403

GDICLK16M (3)

R404

C401

+5 V

DG

RESETIN
RESETOUT
ENCODE
START
CLOCK
CCDDT
HSYNC

128
129
130
131

X1IN
X1OUT
CLK1OUT
CLK16MHZ

20
21
22
23

X2IN
X2OUT
CLK2OUT
DOTCLK

106
13

PINT
PREADY

45
46
47
48
49

TESTOUT
TESTIN
CLK121
PGACS
CPUSEL

3
DG

IC402A

+5 V

L400

/ACK
R420
R421

68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61

R424-R431
R424
R425
R426
R427
R428
R429
R430
R431

69
70

/AUTOFD 2

MA0
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MA5
MA6
MA7
MA8
MA9

101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92

MMA0
MMA1
MMA2
MMA3
MMA4
MMA5
MMA6
MMA7
MMA8
MMA9

MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7

79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86

MMD0
MMD1
MMD2
MMD3
MMD4
MMD5
MMD6
MMD7

DWR
IRAS
ICAS
ICASI
XRAS0
XRAS1
XCAS0
XCAS1

87
88
89
113
74
75
76
77

NC
NC
NC

123
124
125

MMA0
MMA1
MMA2
MMA3
MMA4
MMA5
MMA6
MMA7
MMA8
MMA9

10
11
12
13
16
17
18
19
20
9
6
21
15
28

A0
DQ1
A1
DQ2
DQ3
A2
DQ4
A3
A4
DQ5
DQ6
A5
A6
DQ7
A7
DQ8
A8
RAS/
A9
CAS/
NC
W/
OE/
NC
VSS VCC
VSS VCC

2
3
4
5
24
25
26
27
8
23
7
22
1
14

MMD0
MMD1
MMD2
MMD3
MMD4
MMD5
MMD6
MMD7

R434
R435
R436

MMD1

MMD3

+5 V
MMA0
MMA1
MMA2
MMA3
MMA4
MMA5
MMA6

C410

DG

DG

MMD4
MMD5

R437
R438
R439
R440

MMD6
MMD7
MMA7
MMA8
MMA9

MMD1

10

MMD2
IC402B

MMD3

PR

DG

DG

+5 V

+5 V

CLK
CL

8
IC401

L401

MMD4

MMD5

14

14

IC402

DG

B407

MMD6

13

C407

MMD7

VCC GND

VCC GND

C400
DG

DG

B409

FG

CN9

1
DG

B411

B414

/FAULT

/INIT
B416

/SELIN

C409

CN19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

MMD0

MMD2

M5M44800CJ-7

DG

+5 V

MMD0

11

B415

+5 V

C400

VSS
DQ0
DQ16
DQ1
DQ17
DQ2
DQ18
DQ3
DQ19
VCC
NC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
NC
DQ4
DQ20
DQ5
DQ21
DQ6
DQ22
DQ7
DQ23
A7
NC
VCC
A8
A9
NC
/RAS2
NC
NC
NC
NC
VSS
/CAS0
/CAS2
/CAS3
/CAS1
/RAS0
NC
NC
/WE
NC
DQ8
DQ24
DQ9
DQ25
DQ10
DQ26
DQ11
DQ27
DQ12
DQ28
VCC
DQ29
DQ13
DQ30
DQ14
DQ31
DQ15
NC
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
NC
VSS

2-176438-7

DG

DG

DG

1
2

MMD(0-7)

C406

B412

MMA(0-9)

C404C405

B405

1
2

SELECT
DT1
DT2
DT3
DT4
DT5
DT6
DT7
DT8

DG

C402

B410

B403

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

1
2

PERROR 2

C403

B408

BUSY

R422

/INTCLR

12

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

1
2

R419

132
127
122
108
105
102
91
78
72
60
55
36
24
19
1

R401

DG

CDIR
CEN

CLK8M
CLK8M

CL

10

B406

JP401

DG

IC403

144
126
109
90
73
54
37
18

CLK

11

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

IC400

VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC

PR

R400
GDI_INT(3)

CD0
CD1
CD2
CD3
CD4
CD5
CD6
CD7

PWR
PRD
PASTB

103
104
R433
/DLYRESE(2)

59
58
53
51
56
52
50
57
71

B401

R423

1
2

R414
R415
R416
R417
R418

C408

DT(1-8)

PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7

111
112
110

/EWR(3)
/ERD(3)
ASB(3)

IC401D
8

IC401E

DG

ACK
BUSY
INIT
FAULT
SELECT
AUTOFD
SELECTIN
PERROR
STROBE

B404

1
2

R414-R418

6
9

LDON
LDPD
TNFUL
LSUCLK
SMLOCK
SMON
CSTOPEN
OPTCSL
PSSC
PEC
PSST
PET

ED(0-7)

ED(0-7)

3
4
5
141
142
143
11
9
8
10
6
7

SSR
MMB
MMA
MMEN
DENSI
DENSO
BIAS
HVTP
HVEN
HVM

EA8
EA9
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
EA15

32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114

EA(8-15)

EA(8-15)

44
40
38
42
35
34
39
33
41
43

+5 V

B402

B413

1
2

R413

IC401C

DG

13

R410 R411 R412

B400

678 94 32 1

DT1
DT2
DT3
DT4
DT5
DT6
DT7
DT8

R405-R412

IC401A

RA400

L403

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

E
354

Control PCB 7/7


A

12V

1
D(0-7)
A(0-3)

+12V

A(0-3)
C511
39
38
37
36
34
33
32
31

IC500
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

44
43
42
41

A0
A1
A2
A3

/DLYRD
/WR

48
46

RD
WR

/IOCS
/DLYRESET

47
54

IOCS
DLYRESET

CLK_16M(4)

CLK 16M

51

SYSCLK

OPT_INT(2)

OPT INT

56

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
/DLYRD(2)
/WR(2)
/IOCS(2)
/DLYRESET(2)

63
62
64

8
9
19

R500

18

3
CTS2 4
RTS2 5
DSR2 6
DTR2
RXD1 29
TXD1 28
RXD2 1
TXD2 2

DG
VCC
OUTA
OUTB
OUTC
OUTD

14
R501

3
6

INT
FTXRDY1
FRXRDY1
FBRK1

7
27
30
49
57

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

17
20
26
35
40
50
52
53
58

XOUT

11

DG
IC502
16

14
13
12
11
10
DG

VDD

DDI

RX1

DII

TX1

DO2

RX2

DI2

TX2

DO3

RX3

DI3

TX3

GND

B502

1
B510

DG

VCC

VSS

R503+R508

2 R503

DSR

3 R504

RTS

4 R505

CTS

5 R506

DTR

6 R507

RXD

7 R508

TXD

B503

B504

B505

8
2

B506

C508
DG

B507

L501
2

1
L500

12V

27

30

49

57

C502

DG

13
25
12
24
11
23
10
22
9
21
8
20
7
19
6
18
5
17
4
16
3
15
2
14
1

+12V
VGAR

B501

C509

D500-D507

+5V

2
CN8

DG

B509

C510

C501

DG

B500

+12V

15

FTXRDY2
FRXRDY2
XIN

R502

VGAR
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC

R1
DCD

DG

+5V

9
C500

C512

DG IC501
1
VEE
2
4 INA
5 INB1
10 INB2
9 INC1
13 INC2
12 IND1
IND2
7 GND

CI1 16
CD1 21
25
CTS1 22
RTS1 23
DSR1 24
DTR1

X500

D(0-7)

RI
DCD
DSR
RTS
CTS
DTR
RXD
TXD

C503 C504 C505 C506 C507

DG

8
12V

3-7-11
E

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

E
354

NCU (Network control unit) PCB


A

1
S
C11

L1

MCN1-3

L2

MCN1-4

1 ACIN
V2

MCN1-5

EXTEL1

MCN2-3

EXTEL2

MCN2-4

D7

TR10

S G

S G

F G
FG3

CN1-3

KCMCNT

CN1-11

OFFHOOK

TR1

PC4
2

C15

R8

R9

R28
2

1 IC2a
+

R11

A G

K2

JP

D13

6
12

10

F2

F G
ONHOOK2
FG2

CN1-2

S
R30

K1
F4

ACOUT

S G
JP10

A G L5

9
TEL2

C1

R31

OUT2

A G

ONHOOK1

S G

FG1
MCN1-2

CN1-1
C13

TR9

V1

C17
L1

OUTAC

F G

TEL1

OUT1

C2
S

S G

Vcc

F1

GND

F3

IC1

S G
A G

JP9

CN1-12

RXINN

3
JP7

R10
T1
1
2

D8

R12

3
3

C10

S G
C9

R2
1

SW1

MODTXD

CN1-19
CN1-20

+5V
+5V

CN1-21
CN1-22

SG
SG

C8

CN1-13
CN1-14

+12V
+12V

C6

CN1-15
CN1-16

AG
AG

CN1-17
CN1-18

12V
12V

TR7
+

C3

D2

TR3
2

CN1-4

PLSDIL

CN1-9

KMUTE

S G

JP

D3

C4

JP
L2

PC1
1
4

CN1-7

R26
R5

D1
R3

RXDSEL

C21

A G

+
C28

R1

CN1-6

JP

1
2

MODRXD

C22

S G

R22

R23

CN1-5

8
3

R6

TR5
R24

R21

TR4

JP8

PC2

IC3
6 CH1 COM
7 CH0
VDD
5 S
VEE
2 INH
A G
VSS

A G

N. C. 3 S G

A G

R27
R20

5 IC2b
+

5
6

R15

+ 1

MCN1-1

D10

TEL GND

K3

DB1

L7
MCN1-6

R14
R16

C32

5
TEL GND

JP4

D9

DB2

CN1-10

RNCDET

CN1-8

EARTH C14

JP

+
C7

S G

A G

R4

C18

C5

3-7-12
E

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Operation unit PCB


E

/RESET
NC
NC

C9

C8

NC
NC

L2
C10

KS01

R17

LED6

R16

LED7

R15

LED8

R14

LED1

R13

LED2

R12

LED3

R11

LED4

R10

Q5
X1

/RESET

C12

Q6

Q7

C13

Q1

Q2

5 R/W
4 RS
6 E

Q3

CN2-13

VDD
V0

LCD MODULE

VSS

16character
2line

R9

L1

LED5

2
3

CN2-12

C11
R8

R7

03
KS 2
0
KS 1
0
KS
07
KS
06
KS

Q4

CN2-1
CN2-2
CN2-3
CN2-4

C7

14
D7
13
D6
12
D5
11
D4

C6

SW08 SW16

32

C4 C5

SW07 SW15

R18

31

C3

SW06 SW14 SW22 SW27 SW32

R19

P1

C2

SW05 SW13 SW21 SW26 SW31

R20

22

+ C1

SW04 SW12 SW20 SW25

R21

SW28

P1

CN1-8

SW03 SW11 SW19 SW24 SW30

R22

21

CN1-7

RESET

R23

P1

CN1-6

RSREN

SW02 SW10 SW18 SW23 SW29

20

HSREN

SW01 SW09 SW17

R24

P1

CN1-5

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
NC

R25

P1

SO

VSS
P90
P91
P92
P93
P80
P81
P82
P83
P70
P71
P72
P73
P60
P61
P62
P63
X1
X2
/RESET
P50
P51
P52
P53
P40
P41
P42
P43
P30
P31
P32
P33

CN2-9
CN2-11
CN2-10

R6

P13/INT3
P12/INT2
P11/INT1
P10/INT0
PTH03
PTH02
PTH01
PTH00
TI0
TI1
P23
P22/PCL
P21/PTO1
P20/PTO0
P03/SI
P02/SO
P01//SCK
P00/INT4
P123
P122
P121
P120
P133
P132
P131
P130
P143
P142
P142
P140
NC
VDD

CN2-5
CN2-6
CN2-7
CN2-8

CN1-4

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

10
D3
9
D2
8
D1
7
D0

KCLK

R5

CN1-3

R4

SI

R3

CN1-2

R2

CN1-1

SG

IC1

5V

R1

L3

KS07

KS06

KS03

KS02

CN2-14

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

SW19

SW20

SW21

SW22

LED2

LED3

SW30

SW26

SW2

SW3

SW5

SW6

SW4

SW7

SW8

SW9

SW10

SW11

SW1

SW12

SW29

SW27

SW28

LED
No.
1
2
3
4

LED5
SW32
LED4
LED8
SW23

LED7
SW31

LED1

SW
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

On-Hook/Clear
Error
On-Line
Half-Tone

COLOR
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN

NAME
Auto Rx.
TAD
Fine
Super Fine

LED6
SW25

SW24

LED
No.
5
6
7
8

NAME

COLOR
GREEN
RED
GREEN
GREEN

NAME
0
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS
8 TUV
9 WXYZ
*
#

SW
NAME
No.
13 One Touch 1
14 One Touch 2
15 One Touch 3

SW
NAME
No.
23 Copy Space
24 Reset/Eject
25 Start

16
17
18
19
20
21

One Touch 4
One Touch 5
One Touch 6
One Touch 7
One Touch 8
One Touch 9

26
27
28
29
30
31

Enter
On-Hook Clear
Redial/Pause
ABBR
Menu
Resolution

22

One Touch 10

32

RX Mode

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Connection Diagram
A

G
Opution Memory
(for GDI)
72P

Opution Memory
(for FAX)
40P

H LIVE
H NEUTRAL

CR

FUSE: 3
100 - 120V: 2.5A 125V
220 - 240V: T2.5A 250V
CN5-1

HEATER
CONTROL
CIRCUIT

24 V
PG
5V
SG
12 V
12 V
H REM

24 V
24 V
PG
NC
NC
5V
NC
NC
SG
NC
NC
12 V
12 V
H REM
ESW

CN6-1
CR:
100 - 120V: 0.1F 120 1/2W 125V
220 - 240V: 0.1F 120 1/2W 250V

FSW

3
2
1

PSSW

3
2
1

TH

H NEUTRAL
H LIVE

H
145C
FTH2

5V
SG
ESW

3
2
1

SG
FSW
5V
5V
SG
PSSW
TH
SG
5V
TEDS
SG

TEDS
150C
FTH1

24 V
MC, DB REM
TC REM

Cleaning Bias

DB CHARGE
PG

HVTPCB

+24 V (SSW)

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7

MC/DB REM
TC REM
DB CHG1
DB CHG2
LEAK
PG

FSOL

2 2
1 1

2 1
1 2

CL

MMA
MMA
24 V
24 V
MMB
MMB

MM

MCLK
MSYNC
MSTART
PG
24 V
HSYNC
5V
SG
LD
VIDEO
VR

LSU

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN2-6
CN2-5
CN2-4
CN2-3
CN2-2
CN2-1

CN2-1
CN2-2
CN2-3

CN14-1
CN14-2

CN17-1
CN17-2
CN17-3
CN17-4
CN17-5
CN17-6

CN13-1
CN13-2
CN13-3
CN13-4
CN13-5
CN13-6

CN18-1
CN18-2

CN12-2
CN12-1

CN3-1
CN3-2
CN3-3
CN4-1
CN4-2
CN4-3
CN4-4
CN4-5
CN4-6
CN4-7

CPCB

CN5-1
CN5-2
CN5-3
CN5-4
CN6-1
CN6-2
CN6-3
CN6-4
CN6-5
CN6-6
CN7-1
CN7-2
CN7-3
CN7-4
CN7-5
CN7-6
CN7-7
CN7-8
CN7-9
CN7-10
CN7-11

CN11-14
CN11-13
CN11-12
CN11-11
CN11-10
CN11-9
CN11-8
CN11-7
CN11-6
CN11-5
CN11-4
CN11-3
CN11-2
CN11-1

CN10-1
CN10-2
CN10-3
CN10-4
CN10-5
CN10-6
CN10-7
CN10-8
CN10-9
CN10-10
CN10-11
CN10-12
CN10-13
CN10-14
CN10-15
CN10-16
CN10-17
CN10-18
CN10-19
CN10-20
CN10-21
CN10-22

5 V 24 V

PG

RS CONNECTOR

CN16-38
CN16-39
CN16-40
CN15-1
CN15-2
CN15-3
CN15-4
CN15-5
CN15-6
CN15-7
CN15-8
CN15-9
CN15-10

CN8

FSOL REM
24 V
24 V
CL REM

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7

SIG
SG
5V
12 V
SG
SI
SG
CLK
LED REM
24V

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10

24 V
FM REM

CIS

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10

FM

ADFMA
ADFMA
24 V
24 V
ADFMB
ADFMB

ADFM

SG
SP

SP

FUSE: 1, 2
100 - 120V: 8.0A 125V
220 - 240V: T3.15A 250V

FUSE3

DDSW
SG
5V
ADFTIMSW
SG
5V
5V
SG
SI
KCLK
SO
HSREN
RSREN
RESET

ONHOOK1
ONHOOK2
TELSEL
PLSDIL
MODRXD
RXSEL
MODTXD
EARTH
KMUTE
RNGDET
OFFHOOK
RXINN
12 V
12 V
AG
AG
12 V
12 V
5V
5V
SG
SG

1
2
3

DDSW

1
2
3

ADFTIMSW

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8

CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN1-13
CN1-14
CN1-15
CN1-16
CN1-17
CN1-18
CN1-19
CN1-20
CN1-21
CN1-22

5
OPCB

TEL.
LINE

6
EXIT
TEL.

HANDSET

NCUPCB

FUSE2

CN9

FUSE1

NOIZE
FILTER

CN2-1

DC POWER
SUPPLY

CN3-1

AC
NEUTRAL

NOIZE
FILTER

AC
LIVE

CN16-1
CN16-2
CN16-3

CN19-1
CN19-2
CN19-3

PSPCB
INLET

CN19-70
CN19-71
CN19-72

SSW

GDI CONNECTOR

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

Wiring Diagram
A

GDI
Connector

RS-232C
Connector

CN9

CN8

SSW

HANDSET

FM

CN14
BK

1 24 V

BK

2 FM REM

CN1

NCU PCB

TEL LINE
INPUT

NC

NC

TEL L1

TEL L2

NC

NC

CN1

CN10
1

ONHOOK1

MCN02

ONHOOK2

TELSEL
PLSDIL

MODRXD

RXSEL

MODTXD

EARTH

KMUTE

RNGDET

10

OFFHOOK

11

RXINN

12

MCN01

12 V

13

TEL GND

12 V

14

TEL1

AG

15

L1

AG

16

L2

17

TEL2

12 V
12 V

TEL GND

5V

19

5V

20

SG

21

SG

22

18

BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN

24 V

ONHOOK1

PG

ONHOOK2

5V

TELSEL

SG

PLSDIL

12 V

MODRXD

12 V

RXSEL

H REM

MODTXD

EARTH

KMUTE

CPCB

BN
PK

BE
BE
BE
BE
ADFM

BE

GY
YW

(OPTION)
MEMORY
PCB
for GDI

72P

13 12 V
14 12 V

CN1

3
2

FSW

1
3
PSSW

YW
YW
YW
YW

YW

BK

YW

BK

SP

5V

NC

AC LIVE

SG

CN2

NC

AC NEUTRAL

12 V

CN5

12 V

H LIVE

PSPCB
CN3
1

GROUND

2
1

CN6
1

BK
WE

15 AG
16 AG
17
18

UNIT

CN16

CN1
40P

(OPTION)
MEMORY
PCB
for FAX

40P

12 V
12 V

19 5 V
20 5 V
CN3

21 SG

OE

22 SG

PK
BE

MMA

MMA

24 V

24 V

5
6

5V

TEDS

SG

CN1
1

MCLK
CN15

MMB
MMB

ADFMA

MSYNC

SIG

MSTART

SG

PG

5V

24 V

12 V

SG

SI

SG

8
9

CN1

SIG

SG

5V

12 V

SG

SI

SG

ADFMA

CLK

24 V

LED REM

24 V

24 V

10

ADFMB

ADFMB

BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN

CN2
HSYNC

5V

SG

CLK

LD

LED REM

VIDEO

VR

10 24 V

WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE

CN7

HVT PCB
CN4

+24 V (SSW)

MC/DB REM

MCLK

TC REM

MSYNC

DB CHG1

MSTART

DB CHG2

PG

LEAK

24 V

PG

HSYNC

5V

CN18

SG

TH

LD

SG

CN1

BK

BK
BK

GRID
TRANSFER CHARGE

3 TC REM

BK

4 DB CHG1

BK

DEV. BIAS

5 DB CHG2

BK

6 LEAK

BK

7 PG

WE
TH

WE

Fixing UNIT

11 VR

150C

145C

FTH1

CN17

CN5

1 SG

FSOL REM

2 FSW

24 V

3 5V

24 V

4 5V

CL REM

GN
GN
GN
GN

FSOL
1

5V

SG

ESW

MAIN CHARGE

+24 V (SSW)

2 MC/DB REM

10 VIDEO

CN2

NC

IMAGEING

12 RXINN

CN13
BE

PE

PG

H NEUTRAL

LSU

RD

BE

72P

CIS

RD

OE

11 OFFHOOK

CN6
YW

BE

CN19

10 RNGDET

MM

RD

24 V

10 H REM

TEDS

LB

INLET

CN1
1

PK
PK
PK

FTH2

3
2

ESW

WIRE COLOR
BLACK
BROWN
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
WHITE
PINK
RED
ORANGE
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
GRAY
GREEN/YELLOW
RED/WHITE

CL

5 SG
CN11

6 PSSW

CN12
1 SP
2 SG

RESET

RSREN

HSREN

SO

KCLK

SI

SG

5V

5V

SG

10

ADFTIMSW

11

5V

12

SG

13

DDSW

14

LB

LB

LB

LB

LB

LB

LB

OPCB

LB

CN1

LB

SYMBOL
BK
BN
YW
GN
BE
WE
PK
RD
OE
LB
PE
GY
GN/YW
RD/WE

LB
LB
LB

LB

LB

DDSW

3
2

ADFTIMSW

A
E

3-7 (354/E) A4

A
A

354

CONTENTS
I

THEORY AND CONSTRUCTION SECTION


1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ................................................................................... 1-1-1
1-2 Handling Precautions
1-2-1 Consumables ................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Precautions for Operation ................................................................ 1-2-1
1-2-3 Document ......................................................................................... 1-2-2
1-2-4 Paper ................................................................................................ 1-2-3
1-3 Mechanical Construction
1-3-1 Machine parts names and their functions ......................................... 1-3-1
1-3-2 Machine cross sections .................................................................... 1-3-8
1-3-3 Drive system ..................................................................................... 1-3-9
1-3-4 Mechanical construction ................................................................. 1-3-11

II ELECTRICAL SECTION
2-1 Electrical Parts Layout
2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ....................................................................... 2-1-1
2-2 Detection of Paper Misfeeds
2-2-1 Paper jam detection ......................................................................... 2-2-1
2-2-2 Paper jam detection conditions ........................................................ 2-2-2
2-3 Operation of the PCB
2-3-1 Consists of electric circuit .................................................................. 2-3-1
2-3-2 Power source PCB ............................................................................ 2-3-2
2-3-3 Control PCB ...................................................................................... 2-3-3
2-3-4 NCU PCB (Network control unit PCB) ............................................... 2-3-4
2-3-5 OPCB (Operation unit PCB) .............................................................. 2-3-5
2-3-6 Communication Procedures .............................................................. 2-3-6

III SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION


3-1 Installation
3-1-1 Unpacking and installation ............................................................... 3-1-1
3-1-2 Data setting and registration .......................................................... 3-1-15
3-1-3 Printing system ............................................................................... 3-1-18
3-1-4 Scanning system (TWAIN) ............................................................. 3-1-23
3-1-5 Memory (SIMM) expansion ............................................................. 3-1-26
3-2 Service Mode and Test Mode
3-2-1 Outline of service mode and test mode ............................................. 3-2-1
3-2-2 Service mode .................................................................................... 3-2-2
3-2-3 Test mode ....................................................................................... 3-2-27
3-3 Assembly and Disassembly
3-3-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ..................................... 3-3-1
3-3-2 Outer covers ..................................................................................... 3-3-2
3-3-3 Paper feed section ............................................................................ 3-3-5
3-3-4 Document feed and image reading sections (ADF) ........................ 3-3-11
3-3-5 Optical section ................................................................................. 3-3-19
3-3-6 Transfer section ............................................................................... 3-3-24
3-3-7 Fixing section ................................................................................. 3-3-26

354

3-4

3-5

3-6

3-7

3-3-8 PCBs .............................................................................................. 3-3-36


3-3-9 Adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-3-43
PCB Initial Setting
3-4-1 Replacing the control PCB ............................................................... 3-4-1
3-4-2 Non-adjustable variable resistors (VR) ............................................. 3-4-2
Self-diagnostics
3-5-1 Abnormality detection ........................................................................ 3-5-1
3-5-2 Error code tables ............................................................................... 3-5-4
Troubleshooting
3-6-1 Image formation problems ................................................................ 3-6-1
3-6-2 Paper jams ..................................................................................... 3-6-11
3-6-3 PCB terminal voltages .................................................................... 3-6-13
3-6-4 Electrical problems ......................................................................... 3-6-19
3-6-5 Mechanical problems ...................................................................... 3-6-23
Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ...................................................................................... 3-7-1
Timing chart No. 2 ...................................................................................... 3-7-2
Power source PCB ..................................................................................... 3-7-3
HVT (High voltage transformer) PCB ......................................................... 3-7-4
Control PCB 1/7 ........................................................................................... 3-7-5
Control PCB 2/7 ........................................................................................... 3-7-6
Control PCB 3/7 ........................................................................................................................... 3-7-7
Control PCB 4/7 ........................................................................................................................... 3-7-8
Control PCB 5/7 ........................................................................................................................... 3-7-9
Control PCB 6/7 ........................................................................................................................ 3-7-10
Control PCB 7/7 ......................................................................................... 3-7-11
NCU (Network control unit) PCB .............................................................. 3-7-12
Operation unit PCB .................................................................................... 3-7-13
Connection Diagram .................................................................................. 3-7-14
Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 3-7-15

354

1-1 Specifications
1-1-1

Specifications .................................................................................... 1-1-1

354

1-2 Handling Precautions


1-2-1

1-2-2
1-2-3
1-2-4

Consumables .................................................................................... 1-2-1


( 1 ) Paper .......................................................................................... 1-2-1
( 2 ) Imaging unit ................................................................................ 1-2-1
Precautions for Operation ................................................................. 1-2-1
Document .......................................................................................... 1-2-2
( 1 ) Types of document ..................................................................... 1-2-2
Paper ................................................................................................ 1-2-3
( 1 ) Types of paper ........................................................................... 1-2-3

354

1-3 Mechanical Construction


1-3-1

1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4

Machine parts names and their functions ......................................... 1-3-1


( 1 ) Main body ................................................................................... 1-3-1
( 2 ) Handset (For inch models only) ................................................ 1-3-3
( 3 ) Operation panel .......................................................................... 1-3-4
Machine cross sections ..................................................................... 1-3-8
Drive system ..................................................................................... 1-3-9
Mechanical construction .................................................................. 1-3-11
( 1 ) Document feed/image reading sections (ADF) ........................ 1-3-11
( 2 ) Paper feed section ................................................................... 1-3-13
( 3 ) Laser scanning unit .................................................................. 1-3-15
( 4 ) Imaging unit .............................................................................. 1-3-18
( 5 ) Transfer/charge erasing sections ............................................. 1-3-20
( 6 ) Fixing section ........................................................................... 1-3-21

354

2-1 Electrical Parts Layout


2-1-1

Electrical parts layout ........................................................................ 2-1-1

354

2-2 Detection of Paper Misfeeds


2-2-1
2-2-2

Paper jam detection .......................................................................... 2-2-1


Paper jam detection conditions ......................................................... 2-2-2

354

2-3 Operation of the PCB


2-3-1
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-3-5
2-3-6

Consists of electric circuit .................................................................. 2-3-1


Power source PCB ............................................................................. 2-3-2
Control PCB ....................................................................................... 2-3-3
NCU PCB (Network control unit PCB) ............................................... 2-3-4
OPCB (Operation unit PCB) .............................................................. 2-3-5
Communication Procedures ............................................................... 2-3-6
( 1 ) Outline ........................................................................................ 2-3-6
( 2 ) Communication Procedures ....................................................... 2-3-7

354

3-1 Installation
3-1-1

3-1-2

3-1-3

3-1-4

3-1-5

Unpacking and installation ................................................................ 3-1-1


( 1 ) Installation environment ............................................................ 3-1-1
( 2 ) Installation procedure ................................................................ 3-1-2
Data setting and registration ........................................................... 3-1-15
( 1 ) Setting ..................................................................................... 3-1-15
( 2 ) Registration ............................................................................. 3-1-17
Printing system ............................................................................... 3-1-18
( 1 ) Recommended computer environment .................................... 3-1-18
( 2 ) Connecting the machine to your computer ............................... 3-1-19
( 3 ) Installing the printer driver and connecting to the printer
in Windows 3.1 ........................................................................ 3-1-20
(3-1) Installing the printer driver ............................................... 3-1-20
(3-2) Connecting to the printer ................................................. 3-1-20
( 4 ) Installing the printer driver, connecting to the printer
and making a test print in Windows 95 ..................................... 3-1-21
(4-1) Installing the printer driver ............................................... 3-1-21
(4-2) Connecting to the machine and making a test print ........ 3-1-22
Scanning system (TWAIN) .............................................................. 3-1-23
( 1 ) Recommended computer environment .................................... 3-1-23
( 2 ) Connecting the machine to your computer ............................... 3-1-24
( 3 ) Installing the TWAIN system .................................................... 3-1-25
(3-1) Windows 3.1 .................................................................... 3-1-25
(3-2) Windows 95 ..................................................................... 3-1-25
Memory (SIMM) expansion .............................................................. 3-1-26

354

3-2 Service Mode and Test Mode


3-2-1
3-2-2

3-2-3

Outline of service mode and test mode ............................................. 3-2-1


Service mode ..................................................................................... 3-2-2
( 1 ) Memory switch settings .............................................................. 3-2-3
( 2 ) Memory switch default setting .................................................... 3-2-4
( 3 ) Memory switch description ......................................................... 3-2-6
Test mode ........................................................................................ 3-2-27
( 1 ) Reading test mode ................................................................... 3-2-28
( 2 ) Modem test mode ..................................................................... 3-2-29
( 3 ) Print test mode ......................................................................... 3-2-31
( 4 ) Aging test mode ....................................................................... 3-2-33
( 5 ) ADF adjustment mode .............................................................. 3-2-35

354

3-3 Assembly and Disassembly


3-3-1
3-3-2

3-3-3

3-3-4

3-3-5
3-3-6
3-3-7

3-3-8

3-3-9

Precautions for assembly and disassembly ...................................... 3-3-1


Outer covers ..................................................................................... 3-3-2
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the rear cover and right cover ............... 3-3-2
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the left cover and left front cover ........... 3-3-3
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the upper cover ..................................... 3-3-4
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the base lid ............................................ 3-3-4
Paper feed section ............................................................................. 3-3-5
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulley ............................. 3-3-5
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pad ................................ 3-3-7
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the lower feed roller ............................... 3-3-8
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the upper feed roller ............................ 3-3-10
Document feed and image reading sections (ADF) ......................... 3-3-11
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF guide ..................................... 3-3-11
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF housing .................................. 3-3-12
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the contact image sensor (CIS) ........... 3-3-13
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF pad ........................................ 3-3-15
( 5 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF paper feed roller
and ADF conveying roller ......................................................... 3-3-16
( 6 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF eject roller .............................. 3-3-18
Optical section .................................................................................. 3-3-19
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the laser scanning unit ........................ 3-3-19
Transfer section ............................................................................... 3-3-24
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller ................................ 3-3-24
Fixing section .................................................................................. 3-3-26
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermistor ............................. 3-3-26
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater ................................... 3-3-29
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ...................................... 3-3-31
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the press roller ..................................... 3-3-32
( 5 ) Detaching and refitting the separation claw ............................. 3-3-33
( 6 ) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermostat 1 and 2 ............... 3-3-34
( 7 ) Detaching and refitting the eject roller ...................................... 3-3-35
PCBs ............................................................................................... 3-3-36
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the control PCB (CPCB) ...................... 3-3-36
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the NCU PCB ...................................... 3-3-37
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the high voltage transformer PCB ....... 3-3-38
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the power source PCB ........................ 3-3-40
( 5 ) Detaching and refitting the operation unit ................................. 3-3-42
Adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-3-43
( 1 ) Adjusting the document reading density threshold ................... 3-3-43
( 2 ) Adjusting the paper leading edge registration timing ............... 3-3-44
( 3 ) Adjusting the center registration ............................................... 3-3-46
( 4 ) Adjusting the document leading edge registration timing ......... 3-3-48
( 5 ) Adjusting the document trailing edge registration timing .......... 3-3-50
( 6 ) Adjusting the document reading start position
(main scanning direction) ......................................................... 3-3-52

354

3-4 PCB Initial Setting


3-4-1
3-4-2

Replacing the control PCB ................................................................ 3-4-1


Non-adjustable variable resistors (VR) ............................................. 3-4-2

354

3-5 Self-diagnostics
3-5-1
3-5-2

Abnormality detection ........................................................................ 3-5-1


Error code tables ................................................................................ 3-5-4

354

3-6 Troubleshooting
3-6-1

3-6-2
3-6-3

3-6-4

3-6-5

Image formation problems ................................................................ 3-6-1


( 1 ) No printing (entirely white). ........................................................ 3-6-3
( 2 ) No printing (entirely black). ........................................................ 3-6-3
( 3 ) Printing is too light. .................................................................... 3-6-4
( 4 ) Background is visible. ................................................................ 3-6-4
( 5 ) A white line appears longitudinally. ........................................... 3-6-5
( 6 ) A black line appears longitudinally. ........................................... 3-6-5
( 7 ) A black line appears laterally. .................................................... 3-6-6
( 8 ) One side of the printing is darker than the other. ...................... 3-6-6
( 9 ) Black dots appear on the printing. ............................................. 3-6-7
(10) Printing is blurred. ...................................................................... 3-6-7
(11) The leading edge of the printing is consistently misaligned
with the original. ........................................................................ 3-6-8
(12) Paper creases. .......................................................................... 3-6-8
(13) Offset occurs. ............................................................................ 3-6-9
(14) Printing is party missing. ............................................................ 3-6-9
(15) Fixing is poor. .......................................................................... 3-6-10
Paper jams ...................................................................................... 3-6-11
PCB terminal voltages .................................................................... 3-6-13
( 1 ) Power source PCB .................................................................. 3-6-13
( 2 ) Control PCB ............................................................................ 3-6-14
( 3 ) Operation unit PCB ................................................................. 3-6-17
( 3 ) Network control unit PCB ........................................................ 3-6-18
Electrical problems .......................................................................... 3-6-19
( 1 ) The machine does not operate when the power plug is
connected to a wall outlet. ....................................................... 3-6-19
( 2 ) Error indicator lamp lights. ....................................................... 3-6-19
( 3 ) The main motor does not rotate. ............................................. 3-6-20
( 4 ) The paper feed solenoid does not operate. ............................. 3-6-20
( 5 ) The cooling fan motor does not rotate. .................................... 3-6-20
( 6 ) The ADF motor does not rotate. .............................................. 3-6-20
( 7 ) The fixing heater does not turn on.
(Fixing thermostat 1, 2 operates.) ........................................... 3-6-21
( 8 ) The fixing heater does not turn off. .......................................... 3-6-21
( 9 ) The cleaning lamp does not light. ............................................ 3-6-21
(10) Main charger does not turn on.
(The paper is printed in all black.) ........................................... 3-6-21
(11) No developing bias voltage is output.
(Print density is extremely light.) ............................................. 3-6-22
(12) Transfer charging is not performed.
(The paper is not printed at all.) .............................................. 3-6-22
(13) No sound coming from the speaker ........................................ 3-6-22
Mechanical problems ....................................................................... 3-6-23
( 1 ) No document feed. ................................................................... 3-6-23
( 2 ) Skewed document feed. ........................................................... 3-6-23
( 3 ) Multiple sheets of document are fed at one time. ..................... 3-6-23
( 4 ) Document jam .......................................................................... 3-6-23

354

(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)

No paper feed. .......................................................................... 3-6-23


Skewed paper feed. ................................................................. 3-6-24
Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ........................... 3-6-24
Paper jam. ................................................................................ 3-6-24
Toner drops on the inner machine. .......................................... 3-6-24
Abnormal noise is heard. .......................................................... 3-6-24

354

3-7 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ......................................................................................... 3-7-1
Timing chart No. 2 ......................................................................................... 3-7-2
Power source PCB ........................................................................................ 3-7-3
HVT (High voltage transformer) PCB ............................................................ 3-7-4
Control PCB 1/7 ............................................................................................. 3-7-5
Control PCB 2/7 ............................................................................................. 3-7-6
Control PCB 3/7 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7-7
Control PCB 4/7 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7-8
Control PCB 5/7 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7-9
Control PCB 6/7 ........................................................................................................................... 3-7-10
Control PCB 7/7 ........................................................................................... 3-7-11
NCU (Network control unit) PCB ................................................................. 3-7-12
Operation unit PCB ...................................................................................... 3-7-13
Connection Diagram .................................................................................... 3-7-14
Wiring Diagram ............................................................................................ 3-7-15

PointSource Vi 30
Service Manual
Published in May 97
84354110

PointSource Vi30 S/M (MCE)

354

3-1-1 Unpacking and installation


( 1 ) Installation environment
1. Temperature: 10 - 32.5C/50 - 90F
2. Humidity: 20 - 80%RH
3. Power supply:
120 V AC, 12 A or more
220 - 240 V AC, 8 A or more
* To protect the equipment from electrical surges that can be caused by, among
other things, lightning strikes and utility company switching, a quality surge
suppressor should be installed. This should protection on both the power line and
the telephone line.
4. Power source frequency: 50/60 Hz 0.3%
5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Make sure that the photoconductor will not
be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature
changes, and hot or cold air directly hitting the machine.
Avoid dust and vibration.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowable inclination: 1).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the
photoconductor, such as mercury, acidic and alkaline vapors, inorganic gases,
NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 500 mm/20 Machine rear: 150 mm/6
Machine right: 500 mm/20 Machine left: 500 mm/20

g
f
b

c
d
a

a:
b:
c:
d:
e:
f:
g:
h:
i:

1403 mm, 551/4


500 mm, 20
403 mm, 157/8
500 mm, 20
500 mm, 20
308 mm, 121/8
150 mm, 6
958 mm, 3711/16
500 mm, 20

Figure 3-1-1 Installation dimensions

3-1-1

354
( 2 ) Installation procedure
Start
Installing the eject tray.
Unpacking.
Attaching the handset rest and
connecting the handset. *1

Removing the tape.

Connecting a phone line.

Removing the spacers.

Loading paper.

Installing the imaging unit.

Connecting the power cord.

Installing the paper feed tray.

Data setting and registration.

Installing the document table.

Completion of machine installation.


Paper feed tray

Power cord

Document table

Handset *1
Handset rest *1

Modular cord

Imaging unit
Drum cover

*1: For inch models only

Spacer

Spacers

Eject tray

Figure 3-1-2

3-1-2

354
Unpack.

2 3

*2

9
*2

0 fi
!

1
5

fl *2

6
7

*3

& ^

Figure 3-1-3 Unpacking


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$

Tray spacer
Plastic bag
Left pad
Paper feed tray
Bottom pad (left)
Machine
Outer case
Imaging unit set
Right pad
Plastic sheet
Bottom pad (right)
One-touch dial label
Envelope
3.5" floppy disk (3) *1

%
^
&
*
(
)

fi
fl

Plastic bag
Plastic bag
Eject tray
Document table
Accessory case
OHP transparency guide
Modular cord
Power cord
Upper spacer
Air cap bag * 2
Handset rest *2
Handset *2
Language instruction label *3

*1: Windows 3.1 Printer Driver Installer Disk (1 Floppy Disk)


Windows 95 Printer Driver Installer Disk (1 Floppy Disk)
TWAIN System Installer Disk (1 Floppy Disk)
*2: For inch models only
*3: For metric models only

3-1-3

354

8
2

Figure 3-1-4 Unpacking (Imaging unit set)


1
2
3
4
5

3-1-4

IU case
Aluminum bag
Left pad
Leaflet (Replacing the imaging unit)
Leaflet (Cleaning inside the machine)

6
7
8
9

Cleaning cloth
Vinyl bag
Imaging unit
Right pad

354
354-1
. Removing the tape

1. Remove the four pieces of protective tape from the machine.

Protective tape

Protective tape

Protective tape

Protective tape

Figure 3-1-5
Removing the spacers.
1. While pulling forward the main body release lever on the right side of the
machine, open to the position where the machine main body stops.
2. Remove the spacer a from inside of the machine.
3. Remove the 2 pieces of spacer b from inside of the machine.

Main body release lever

Spacer a
Spacers b

Figure 3-1-6

3-1-5

354
Installing the imaging unit.
1. Lift the imaging unit out of the case. Tear open the imaging unit package at the
notch, and take the imaging unit out of the package.

Tear here.

Figure 3-1-7
2. Hold the imaging unit horizontally and slowly shake it a few times from side to
side to agitate toner in the imaging unit.

Figure 3-1-8

3-1-6

354
3. Hold the imaging unit left and right handles, check that the imaging unit is
aligned forward-rear, then install the imaging unit on the machine main body as
shown in the figure.
4. Remove the protective tapes on both sides of the imaging unit, and then
remove the drum cover from the unit.
Handles

Drum cover

Protective tapes

Figure 3-1-9
5. Gently close the machine.
* If the machine does not close properly, the imaging unit may not be set
properly. Reinstall the imaging unit correctly.

Figure 3-1-10

3-1-7

354
Installing the paper feed tray.
1. Take the paper feed tray out of its package and remove the protective tape.

Protective tape

Paper feed tray

Figure 3-1-11
2. Install the paper feed tray on the machine main body by inserting the paper feed
tray right/left guides along the machine main body rails.
Paper feed tray

Guide
Guide

Figure 3-1-12

3-1-8

354
To remove the paper feed tray, press in the two release buttons located on the
rear of the table and pull the paper feed tray out of the machine.

Release buttons

Figure 3-1-13
Installing the document table.
1. Set the document table by inserting the tabs into the slots located on the
machine as shown in the figure.
Tabs
Document table

Figure 3-1-14

3-1-9

354
2. See the figure 3-1-15 and check that the document table and the paper feed
tray are correctly installed.
Document table
Paper feed tray

Figure 3-1-15
Installing the eject tray.
1. Set the eject tray to the machine as shown in the figure.
* To remove the eject tray, pull one side out of the machine first and then the
other.

Eject tray

Figure 3-1-16

3-1-10

354
Attaching the handset rest and connecting the handset.

(For inch models only)

1. Remove the tape from the rear of the handset rest.


2. Insert the hooks of the handset rest into the holes located on the machine to
install it as shown in the figure.

Handset rest

Figure 3-1-17
3. Plug the handset cord into the telephone jack on the machine.
4. Set the handset onto the handset rest.

Telephone jack

Figure 3-1-18

3-1-11

354
Connecting a phone line.
1. Plug one end of the modular cord into the line jack on the machine and the
other end into the phone jack in the room.

Line jack

Figure 3-1-19
Loading paper.
1. Extend the paper feed tray extension.
2. Open the paper feed tray cover.

Paper feed tray extension

Paper feed tray cover

Figure 3-1-20

3-1-12

354
3. With the paper guides sufficiently spread open, set the paper.
4. Adjust the paper guides to match the width of the paper.
* If the paper guide is hard to adjust, remove the document table, then adjust.
Paper guides

Figure 3-1-21
5. Close the paper feed tray cover.
* If the document table has been removed, replace it in its original position.

Figure 3-1-22

3-1-13

354
Connecting the power cord.
1. Plug the power cord into the power receptacle, and connect the other end of the
cord to a wall outlet.
* Once the power cord is connected to the machine and an outlet, the machine
will begin to warm up.
Warm up normally requires less than 40 seconds. Once the machine has
warmed up, it will automatically enter the initial mode (waiting for operation).

Power receptacle

Figure 3-1-23
Data setting and registration
1. Set and register the data according to the items in 3-1-2 Data setting and
registration on Page 3-1-15.
Completion of machine installation.

3-1-14

354

3-1-2 Data setting and registration


When the machine is installed, the following items are set or registered.
( 1 ) Setting
Line type setting
Select the setting (dial line or push-tone line) that matches the telephone line used.
Paper size setting
Set the size of paper used for fax reception (A4, letter (81/2" x 11"), or legal (81/2" x
14")).
Automatic reception mode setting
Select the desired automatic reception mode (fax-only dedicated reception mode or
fax/telephone automatic switching reception mode).
Memory reception setting
Sets whether or not to carry out normal memory reception.
Memory transfer setting
Sets whether or not to use the memory transfer function.
Activity report output condition setting
Sets the condition for outputting activity report (output every 40 communications,
outputs the contents of 24 hours of communications at the set time).
Transmission report output setting
Sets the output condition for transmission report (no output or always output
immediately at end of transmission).
Speaker ON/OFF setting
For manual reception, sets whether or not the calling sounds from the other party are
monitored on the speaker without picking up the external telephone set receiver when
the On-Hook/Clear key is pressed.
Preheat mode setting
Sets the condition under which this machine moves to the preheat state (after five
minutes without operation or at the set time).
PSTN/PBX setting
Select the setting for the exchange system (PSTN or PBX) to which this machine is
connected.
ECM transmission setting
Sets whether or not ECM transmission is used.
User memory setting
Sets the various memory switches that can be set by the user.
The contents of the setting are as follows.
* Number of rings setting (Memory Switch No. 04)
For automatic fax reception, sets the number of rings (1-11) from the arrival of the
call to the start of reception.
* Speaker volume setting (Memory Switch No. 06)
Sets the speaker volume (3 levels).

3-1-15

354
* Reception time printing setting (Memory Switch No. 16)
Sets whether or not the reception year/month/day and time are recorded when a
document is received.
* Error (Alarm) sound setting (Memory Switch No. 54)
Sets whether or not there is a beep when an error occurs.
* Speaker sound setting (Memory Switch No. 56)
Sets whether or not there is sound from the speaker.
* Other party recording setting (Memory Switch No. 66)
Sets whether or not the other party information (fax number, name, etc.) is recorded
on reports.
* Memory input report setting (Memory Switch No. 73)
Sets whether or not a memory input report is output when a document is scanned
during transmission.
* Superfine setting (Memory Switch No. 89)
Sets whether or not copying and reception in superfine mode is enabled.
* Operator-Call bell setting (Memory Switch No. 93)
For fax/telephone automatic switching mode, sets the bell volume (3 levels) when
the incoming call is a telephone (not a fax).
* Transmission mode setting (Memory Switch No. 94)
Sets the transmission mode (ADF transmission or memory transmission).
* Transmission results report image attachment setting (Memory Switch No. 96)
Sets whether or not the image of the first page transmitted is attached to
transmission results reports.
* Printing system time-out setting (Memory Switch No. 97)
Sets whether or not this machine is returned to fax standby status when no image
data is sent from the computer for a certain time during printing with the printing
system.
* Number of rings setting (TAD/message telephone reception) (Memory Switch No.
98)
Sets the number of rings (1-11) for message telephone reception.

3-1-16

354
( 2 ) Registration
Date and time registration
Registers the current date and time.
Own station data registration
Registers your telephone number and station name.
One-touch speed dialing
Registers the other partys facsimile number (telephone number) and name for ten
one-touch speed dialing keys.
Abbreviation dialing
Registers the other partys facsimile number (telephone number) and name for desired
abbreviated number (numeric character 01 to 50).
Group dialing
Registers multiple other parties facsimile numbers (telephone numbers) and names
for ten one-touch speed dialing keys and registers them for group dialing.
Batch dialing
Registers the transmission time and multiple other parties facsimile numbers
(telephone numbers) and names for one of ten one-touch speed dialing keys and
registers them for batch dialing.
Remote switching dialing number
Changes the remote switching number (set to 55 at the factory) for fax reception with
an external telephone.
Password
For memory reception, registers the password (4 digits) for outputting the document.

3-1-17

354

3-1-3 Printing system


This machine can be used as a printer for a computer running Windows 3.1 or Windows
95. It is also possible to print under the DOS mode of both systems using PCL
emulation.
* In this section, there is only list of method to check of computer connection, printer
driver installation, and computer output port.
For more detailed information, see the instruction handbook of this machine or
instruction manual of each application software.
( 1 ) Recommended computer environment
The computer configuration recommended for running the printing system under
Windows 3.1 or Windows 95 are as follows.
[ Windows 3.1]
IBM PC-AT or compatible
Minimum 20MHz 486SX CPU
Minimum 8MB installed RAM
5MB free hard disk space
1 parallel port
3.5" floppy disk drive
1 parallel cable (IEEE 1284 specifications)
[ Windows 95 ]
IBM PC-AT or compatible
Minimum 33MHz 486DX CPU
Minimum 8MB installed RAM
5MB free hard disk space
1 parallel port
3.5" floppy disk drive
1 parallel cable (IEEE 1284 specifications)

3-1-18

354
( 2 ) Connecting the machine to your computer
1. Turn the power of your computer off and unplug the machine power cord from the
outlet.
* Before unplugging the power cord, always check the display of the memory amount
in the message display to see if there is still data (transmission or reception
document data etc.) in this machines memory. If 100% is not displayed, there is
still data remaining. (When the power cord is disconnected, the data in the memory
is lost.)
If there is still data remaining, print or transmit it until there is no data left in memory.
2. Connect the parallel port on the machine to the parallel port on your computer with
a parallel cable. Use the clips attached to the connectors to secure the cable to the
both ports.
* The parallel port (36-pin Centronics IEEE 1284 B-Type connector) on the machine
serves as the interface port for this printing system.

Printer connector (parallel port)

Figure 3-1-24

3-1-19

354
( 3 ) Installing the printer driver and connecting to the printer in Windows 3.1
(3-1) Installing the printer driver
* The following procedure will assume Floppy Drive A is available.
1. Start up Windows 3.1. Quit all other applications that may be open and start up
Program Manager.
2. Insert the Windows 3.1 Printer Driver Installer Disk into Drive A.
3. Use the mouse to point to File in the Menu Bar and click on Run in the dropdown menu which is displayed.
4. Type a:\install in the Command Line dialog box and then click on OK.
5. The installation window will appear. To continue the installation, click on Continue.
6. A window will appear to confirm which floppy drive the Installer Disk is in. Make sure
that A:\ is displayed and click on OK.
7. Another window to reconfirm the floppy drive will appear. Click on OK. Installation of
the printer driver will begin.
8. Once installation is complete, Restart Windows now? will appear. To finalize the
installation procedure, restart Windows 3.1 by clicking on Restart Windows.
9. Once Windows 3.1 is running again, an icon with the name of this printer will
appear.
The facsimile may now be used as a printer.
(3-2) Connecting to the printer
The factory default setting for the printer output port on most computers is LPT1.
Usually there is no need to change this setting, but, in order to confirm the present
setting in your computer, as well as to change it if it does become necessary, carry out
the following procedure.
1. Double-click on the Control Panel icon in the Main group in Program Manager.
2. Double-click on the Printers applet in the Control Panel window. The Printers
dialog box will appear.
3. Make sure that the printer is shown as being connected to the LPT1 port. If it is not,
click on Connect. The Connect dialog box will appear.
* Select the LPT1 port from the Ports list and click on OK to return to the Printers
dialog box.
4. If this printer is not selected as the default setting in the Printers dialog box, click on
Set as Default Printer.
* This printer driver will ignore any settings in the Use Print Manager window.

3-1-20

354
( 4 ) Installing the printer driver, connecting to the printer and making a test print
in Windows 95
(4-1) Installing the printer driver
* The following procedure will assume Floppy Drive A is available.
1. Start up Windows 95. Quit all other applications that may be open.
2. Insert the Windows 95 Printer Driver Installer Disk into Drive A.
3. Click on Start in the Task Bar.
4. Use the mouse to point to Settings and click on Printers in submenu which is
displayed.
5. The Printers folder will open. Double-click on the Add printer icon.
6. The Printer wizard window will open. Click on Next >.
7. A window which will allow you to select the type of printer connection will appear.
Make sure that Local printer is selected and click on Next >.
8. A list of makers and printer names will be displayed. Do not select a printer from this
list, but instead click on Have Disk.
9. The Install From Disk window will appear. Make sure that Floppy Drive A is
displayed and click on OK. The name of this printer will be displayed. Click on Next
>.
10. The Available ports list will appear. Make sure that the port to which the printer is
connected (usually LPT1) is highlighted and click on Next >.
11. The Printer wizard window will display the default name for the printer.
If desired, you may change the displayed printer name. Even if the name is
changed, operation will not be affected.
12. Click on Yes to select this printer as the default printer. If you do not want this
printer to be the default printer, click on No.
13. Click on Finish.
Installation of the printer driver will begin. Once the icon with the name of this printer
appears in the Printers folder, installation is complete.
The facsimile may now be used as a printer.

3-1-21

354
(4-2) Connecting to the machine and making a test print
The factory default setting for the printer output port on most computers is LPT1.
Usually there is no need to change this setting, but, in order to confirm the present
setting in your computer, as well as to change it if it does become necessary, carry out
the following procedure.
1. Click on Start in the Task Bar. Use the mouse to point to Settings and click on
Printers in the submenu which is displayed.
2. The Printers folder will open. Use the right mouse button to click on the icon for this
printer.
3. Make sure that there is a check mark to the left of Set As Default in the drop-down
menu which is displayed.
If there is no check mark next to it, click on Set As Default and use the right mouse
button to click on the icon for this printer once again.
4. Click on Properties in the menu which is displayed and then click on the Details
tab in the window which appears.
5. Make sure that the LPT1 port is shown in the text box under Ports. If it is not, use
the mouse to click on the drop-down arrow in the right of the text box and check the
available ports from the drop-down list which is displayed.
6. Click on the General tab and then on Print. A test page will be printed out.
* If a Status Window dialog box appears when Properties is selected and a test
page printed out, check to see that.
The power cord is connected correctly to the printer.
An appropriate parallel cable is attached securely to both the printer and computer
ports.
7. Once the test page is printed out successfully and operation is normal, click on OK
to close the Properties dialog box.

3-1-22

354

3-1-4 Scanning system (TWAIN)


* In this section, there is only list of method to check of computer connection, scanner
driver (TWAIN) installation, and computer output port.
For more detailed information, see the instruction handbook of this machine or
instruction manual of each application software.
( 1 ) Recommended computer environment
The computer configuration recommended for running the scanning system under
Windows 3.1 and Windows 95 are as follows.
IBM PC-AT or compatible
Minimum 33MHz 486SX CPU
Windows 3.1: Minimum 8MB installed RAM, Windows 95: Minimum 16MB installed
RAM
32MB free hard disk space
1 serial port
3.5" floppy disk drive
1 RS-232C cable

3-1-23

354
( 2 ) Connecting the machine to your computer
* Use a 24-pin RS-232C cable to connect the machine to your computer. The machine
is equipped with a D-SUB25PIN serial port (EIA-232-D) which is located at the rear of
the machine. Check both the connector port on the machine and on your computer
before selecting a cable for connection.
1. Turn the power to your computer off and unplug the machine power cord from the
outlet.
* Before unplugging the power cord, always check the display of the memory amount
in the message display to see if there is still data (transmission or reception
document data etc.) in this machines memory. If 100% is not displayed, there is
still data remaining. (When the power cord is disconnected, the data in the memory
is lost.)
If there is still data remaining, print or transmit it until there is no data left in memory.
2. Connect the serial port on the machine to the serial port on your computer with a
RS-232C cable, use the screws on each side of the cable connector to secure the
cable to each port.

Printer connector
(serial port)

Figure 3-1-25

3-1-24

354
( 3 ) Installing the TWAIN system
(3-1) Windows 3.1
* The following procedure will assume Floppy Drive A is available.
1. Start up Windows 3.1. Quit all other applications that may be open and start up
Program Manager.
2. Insert the TWAIN System Installer Disk into Drive A.
3. Use the mouse to point to File in the Menu Bar and click on Run in the dropdown menu which is displayed.
4. Type a:\setup in the Command Line dialog box and then click on OK.
5. The installation window will appear. Click on Install.
6. Click on Start. Installation will begin.
7. Once installation is complete, a message indicating whether the installation was
successful or not will be displayed. Click on OK.
The facsimile may now be used as a scanner.
(3-2) Windows 95
* The following procedure will assume Floppy Drive A is available.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Start up Windows 95. Quit all other applications that may be open.
Insert the TWAIN System Installer Disk into Drive A.
Click on Start in the Task Bar and then Run.
Type a:\setup in the Command Line dialog box and then click on OK.
The installation window will appear. Click on Install.
Click on Start. Installation will begin.
Once installation is complete, a message indicating whether the installation was
successful or not will be displayed. Click on OK.

The facsimile may now be used as a scanner.

3-1-25

354

3-1-5 Memory (SIMM) expansion


When this machine is used as a printer, commonly available 4MB SIMMs can be
mounted as expansion memory. Expanding the memory speeds up continuous printing
with high print quality, for example 600 dpi.
Precautions
* Always unplug the power cord before these operations.
Before unplugging the power cord, always check the display of the memory amount
in the message display to see if there is still data (transmission or reception
document data etc.) in this machines memory. If 100% is not displayed, there is still
data remaining. (When the power cord is disconnected, the data in the memory is
lost.)
If there is still data remaining, print or transmit it until there is no data left in memory.
* Disconnect all connectors connected to this machine (computer connection cable,
telephone line, etc.) before starting these operations.
* Remove the imaging unit, paper feed tray, document tray, and eject tray before
starting these operations.
* Memory is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Always discharge any static
electricity safely before starting these operations.
* Always work on a level, stable location.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the five screws, then remove the base lid.

Base lid

Figure 3-1-26

3-1-26

354
354-1

2. Firmly insert the connector for the expansion memory into CN 19 (expansion
memory connector) on the control PCB of this machine.
* Make sure that the expansion memory is securely fastened by the clips on both
ends of the expansion memory connector.

Expansion memory
(SIMM)

CN19
(expansion memory connector)

Figure 3-1-27
3. Install the base lid in its original position on the main body of the machine.
4. Install the units (imaging unit, paper feed tray, etc.) removed from the main body of
the machine back in their original positions on the main body of the machine.
5. Connect the disconnected connectors, telephone line, etc. in their original positions.
6. Connect the power cord to the power connector as it was before removal.

3-1-27

354

3-2-1 Outline of service mode and test mode

USER MODE

* When entering the password,


unless each key is pressed
within 2 sec or any other key is
pressed, the machine will return to the user mode at that
time.
Press 0 key.

Press the Function key.

Press the Function key.

Press the # key.

Press the * key

Press 1 key.

Press 2 key.

Press 3 key.

SERVICE MODE

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

no

Power turn off?

yes

3-2-1

354

3-2-2 Service mode

12 / 15

USER MODE

'96

12 : 00
100%

* When entering the password,


unless each key is pressed
within 2 sec or any other key is
pressed, the machine will return to the user mode at that
time.
Press the Function key.

Press the # key.

Press the * key

Press 1 key.

Press 2 key.

Press 3 key.

SERVICE MODE

SERVICE MODE ON
after 1 sec
12 / 15

Press the Function key.

yes

3-2-2

12 : 00
100%

MEMORY FORWARDING
FUNCTION/ENTER

Press 0 key.

'96

SERVICE MODE OFF

Power turn off?

no

Service mode is entered. It is possible


for the machine to
set the memory
switch and carry out
the test mode in this
condition.

After 1 sec, return to


user mode.

354
( 1 ) Memory switch settings

SERVICE MODE

Press the Function key


6 times.

Press the Enter key.

Press the Function key


7 times.

Press the Enter key.

12 / 15

'96

12 : 00
100%

USER SETTING
FUNCTION / ENTER

BASIC SETTING
FUNCTION / ENTER

MEMORY SW SET
FUNCTION / ENTER

MEMORY SW NO. : - 0-9

Use the numeric keys


to enter the desired
MEMORY SW NO. : 01
Refer to "(3)

Memory Switch No. (20 - 9 / ENTER


Memory switch
digits)
descriptions",
page 3-2-6.
Press the Enter key.

Use the numeric keys Refer to "(3) Memory


switch descriptions",
to enter the setting
page 3-2-6.
code corresponding to
the desired setting.

Press the Enter key.

Press the
0 key.

Press the
1 key.

Press the
Enter key.

Press the
Enter key.

0 : CONTINUE / 1 : END
0 - 1 / ENTER

3-2-3

354
354-1
( 2 ) Memory switch default setting
Each default may change according to the setting country.
Section
System operation

SW No.

Contents

Default

00

Fax Auto Reduction Select

09

Transmission Report

10

Initial Resolution

15*

Display & Print Language

16*

RX Time Print

38

Auto Reduction RX

45

G3 Tester Mode

56*

Acoustic Monitor

61*

Class 1 Mode

62*

Class 1 Report

63*

RX Priority

68

Broadcast Report Print

69

Multi-Polling Report Print

73*

Memory Entry Report

75

Information Code

80

Canceled Report Print

81

Error Page Redial

85

Communication Speed Print

86

Communication Speed/Page Display

88

TX Report Print Condition

89*

S-Fine Copy / S-Fine RX Setting

94*

TX Mode

96*

1st Image Print

97*

Printing System Time Out

Initial Position

08*

Closed Network & Select Receive

Transmission

51

1 Meter Jam

39

Receive Side Mask

Reception
Communication

3-2-4

41

Receive Data Hold

04*

Number of Ringing

07*

T.T.I. Print

20

Communication Mode

21

ECM Reception

31

Receive Start Speed

55

CNG Tone

59

Special Speed Communication

66*

Fax Number in Report

98*

Number of Ringing for TAD

10

354
Section
Line/Telephone

Modem Adjust

Print Position/Density
Error Detection
Sensitivity
Protocol Test

Initialize

SW No.

Contents

Default

02

Pause Time

03

Auto Redial

06*

Speaker Buzzer Volume

48

Hook Up Alarm

49

Dial/Busy Tone Detect

54*

Buzzer ON or OFF

82

PABX Ring Detection

83

PABX/PSTN Dial Tone Detection

84

PSTN Tone Detection

90

Sound Signal Check TIme

91

Time for Detection of CNG

92

Time for Calling an Operator

93*

Quasi Ring Volume

26

Attenuator (Trans.)

10

27

Attenuator (DTMF)

28

Receive Level

29

Cable Equalizer

95

Modem Control

52

Print Position (Vertical)

53

Print Position (Horizontal)

32

Carrier OFF Check

12

34

Line Error

35

Consecutive Line Error

23

CED Response Time

24

TSI Transmitting Condition

25

DCS Transmission Timing

33

TCF Check Interval

36

FSK Check Before Phase C

46

Initialize

0
* : Setting item with the User mode.

3-2-5

354
354-1
( 3 ) Memory switch description
SW No.
00

Description
Fax auto reduction select
1 Enter 00 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0

Remark
Setting for fax
auto reduction
select.

Contents
Documents up to 387 mm are automatically
reduced. Longer documents are printed divided
into multiple pages.
Documents up to 319 mm are automatically
reduced. Longer documents are printed divided
into multiple pages.
Documents up to 301 mm are automatically
reduced. Longer documents are printed divided
into multiple pages.

3 Press the Enter key.


02

Pause time
1 Enter 02 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
02
03
|
21

Contents

Setting for pause


time. Pause time
can be set from 2
sec to 21 sec by
1 sec.

2 sec
3 sec
|
21 sec

3 Press the Enter key.


03

Auto redial
1 Enter 03 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
00
01
02
|
11

Contents
Auto redial is not performed.
1 time
2 times
|
11 times

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-6

Setting for auto


redial number. In
the case of no
response for
timer TX/
Broadcasting
etc., auto redial
is performed.

354-1
354
SW No.
04

Description
Number of ringing
1 Enter 04 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
01
02
|
11

Contents
1 time
2 times
|
11 times

Remark
Setting for
number of
ringing. In the
case of auto
receive mode,
number of ringing
to received state
is set. Number of
ringing is set
from 1 to 11 by 1
step.

3 Press the Enter key.


06

Speaker buzzer volume


1 Enter 06 with the numeric keys.

Setting for
speaker volume.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
1
2
3

Contents
Small
Normal
Big

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-7

354
354-1
SW No.
07

Description
T.T.I. print
1 Enter 07 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
Not add
Add

Remark
In the case of
document
transmission,
T.T.I. (Company,
date etc.) is
added or not.

3 Press the Enter key.


T.T.I.: FILE No. XXX
'96 Apr. 16 9 hour 35 minute 04/16/'96 9:35
24 letters
ID name
20 or (19, +) figures
Fax number
P1, P2, P3, ............
Page
Example of T.T.I.
FILE No.XXX Month; Day; Year; Hour; Minute ID name Fax number page

Document

08

Closed network & select receive


1 Enter 08 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
Not add closed network/select
transmission and receive.
Add select receive (lowest 4
figure of FAX number *1)

*1: Abbreviated number dialing key (01 to 50)/Onetouch key (not check /GROUP/BATCH key)

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-8

Sets whether or
not reception is
only carried out
for telephone
numbers
registered for
faxes as
abbreviated
dialing, for onetouch dialing, etc.

354-1
354
SW No.
09

Description
Transmission Report
1 Enter 09 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0
1
2

Contents
Not print transmission report.
Print transmission report.
Print transmission report only if
communication error has
occurred.

Remark
Setting for
transmission
report print
condition.
After
transmission,
print transmission
report.

3 Press the Enter key.


10

Initial resolution
1 Enter 10 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for return


position of
resolution after
transmission.

Contents
Normal mode
Fine mode

3 Press the Enter key.


15

Display & print language


1 Enter 15 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
(3)
*

Setting for the


language of LCD
and print
message.

Contents
First language
Second language
Third language
(Fourth language)

The available languages will differ depending upon


the country of the pruchase.

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-9

354
354-1
SW No.
16

Description
RX time print
1 Enter 16 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0
1
2
3

Contents
Not print
RX time print
TSI print
RX time and TSI print

Remark
Setting for RX
time (RX time:
year/month/day/
hour/minute) print
condition.

3 Press the Enter key.


18

Tone change
1 Enter 18 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for tone


change
condition.

Contents
Holland type
(TONE is unchanged even if key is pressed.)
Other type
(TONE is changed from the next time a key is
pressed when the key is pressed.)
France type
(TONE is changed from the key when the key
is pressed.)

3 Press the Enter key.


20

Communication mode
1 Enter 20 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0

Setting for
communication
mode whether it
is auto or G3.

Contents
Auto means that if the partner has special
mode *1, communication is performed by special
mode, but it has not special mode, communication
performed by G3.
G3 means that communication is always
1
performed by G3.
*1: Special mode is abbreviated protocol.
However, this operation is only possible between these
machines.
3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-10

354-1
354
SW No.
21

Description
ECM reception
1 Enter 21 with the numeric keys.

Remark
Setting for ECM
reception.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
OFF
ON

3 Press the Enter key.


23

CED response time


1 Enter 23 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Contents
35.0 sec
38.5 sec
42.0 sec
45.5 sec
49.0 sec
52.5 sec
56.0 sec
59.5 sec
91.0 sec
119.0 sec

Setting to the
waiting time for
CED. (CED:
CallED station
identification)
The maximum
waiting time is
set. If CED does
not come while
setting time, the
result of
communication is
error.

3 Press the Enter key.


24

TSI transmitting condition


1 Enter 24 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
00
01
02

Contents
Not transmit
Transmit
Transmit if CSI received

3 Press the Enter key.

TSI:
Transmitting
Subscriber
Identification
(TEL number of
transmitter)
CSI:
Called
Subscriber
Identification
(TEL number of
receiver)
Setting for the
condition to
transmit TSI.

3-2-11

354
354-1
SW No.
25

Description
DCS transmission timing
1 Enter 25 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
Response to first DIS.
Response to second DIS.

3 Press the Enter key.

26

Attenuator (trans.)
1 Enter 26 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
00
|
20

Contents

Remark
DCS:
Digital Command
Signal (Digital
Recognition
Signal of
standard facility
of transmitter)
DIS:
Digital
Identification
Signal (Digital
Recognition
Signal of
standard facility
of receiver)
Setting for the
condition to
transmit DCS.

Setting for
transmitting
power level of
FAX signal. (by 1
dBm step)

0 dBm
|
20 dBm

3 Press the Enter key.


27

Attenuator (DTMF.)
1 Enter 27 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
00
|
20

Contents
0 dBm
|
20 dBm

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-12

Setting for
transmitting
power level of
DTMF signal. (by
1 dBm step)

354-1
354
SW No.
28

Description
Receive level
1 Enter 28 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
01
|
11

Contents
38 dBm
|
48 dBm

3 Press the Enter key.


29

Cable equalizer
1 Enter 29 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
0 km
7.2 km

Remark
Setting for
receive level of
FAX signal. (by 1
dBm step)
If FAX signal
which is lower
than setting level
is received, it is
not recognized
as FAX signal.
Setting for cable
equalizer which
rectifies the
characteristics of
the distance from
setting place to
switching office.

3 Press the Enter key.


31

Receive start speed


1 Enter 31 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for
receive start
speed of modem.

Contents
4800 bps
14400 bps

3 Press the Enter key.


32

Carrier off check (carrior interval of RX data)


1 Enter 32 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
00
01
|
12

Contents
0 sec (by 0.5 sec step)
0.5 sec
|
6 sec

Setting for carrier


off check time. If
carrier signal is
cut off during
more than setting
time, only lowspeed command
signal is watched
out up to total 6
seconds.

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-13

354
354-1
SW No.
33

Description
TCF check interval
1 Enter 33 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2

Abbreviated protocol short sequence


OFF
ON
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
150 msec
300 msec
200 msec

Remark
For TCF check
after detection of
TCF signal, time
setting for
stabilizing without
TCF check.

3 Press the Enter key.


34

Line error
1 Enter 34 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5

Contents
0%
5%
10 %
15 %
25 %
OFF

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-14

Setting for error


line treatment.
In the case of the
code error which
exceeds the
number of setting
line in 1 page
occurs, the page
falls into image
quality error and
RTN is sent
back.

354-1
354
SW No.
35

Description
Consecutive line error
1 Enter 35 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Contents
3 line s(Normal mode)/6 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
4 line s(Normal mode)/8 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
5 line s(Normal mode)/10 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
6 lines (Normal mode)/12 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
7 lines (Normal mode)/14 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
8 lines (Normal mode)/16 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
9 lines (Normal mode)/18 lines
(Fine/Super Fine mode)
OFF

Remark
Setting for error
line treatment.
In the case of the
consecutive code
error which
exceeds the
number of setting
line in 1 page
occurs, the page
falls into image
quality error and
RTN is sent
back.

3 Press the Enter key.


36

FSK check before phase C


1 Enter 36 with the numeric keys.

Setting FSK
check before
phase C.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.


Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Contents
OFF
ON
FSK check is not made during 100ms.
FSK check is not made during 200ms.
FSK check is not made during 500ms.
FSK check is not made during 800ms.
FSK check is not made during 1s.
FSK check is not made during 1.5s.
FSK check is not made during 2s.
FSK check is not made during 2.5s.

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-15

354
354-1
SW No.
38

Description
Auto reduction RX
1 Enter 38 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2

Remark
Setting for auto
reduction of
receive mode.

Contents
Not reduce (100%, 2 pages)
Reduce (~70%, 1% notch) Horizontal and vertical
Reduce (~70%, 1% notch) only vertical

3 Press the Enter key.


39

Receive side mask


1 Enter 39 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for side


masking of
receive image.

Contents
Not mask
Mask (Masks the margins on both
side of the paper about 13 mm.)

3 Press the Enter key.


41

Receive data hold


1 Enter 41 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0

Contents
Not hold (Deletes data from
memory in the order in which it
was received. (If there is a jam
during output, that page can not
be printed again.))
Hold (The received data is
printed, but not deleted from
memory until all the data printing
is complete. (If there is a jam
during output, the data can be
printed again.))

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-16

Setting for
receive data hold
in the code
memory until the
image is printed
out completely.

354-1
354
SW No.
45

Description
G3 tester mode
1 Enter 45 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2

Remark
Setting for G3
report printing
after
communication.

Contents
Not print
Print after every communication.
Print only if communication error has occurred.

3 Press the Enter key.


46

Initialize
1 Enter 46 with the numeric keys.

Setting for FAX


data initialize.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.


Setting
0
1
2

Contents
All data clear.
File *1/Command data clear
Abbreviated number dialing key/One-touch key/
P key *2/Batch key data clear
3
Report data clear
4
Memory switch table data clear
5
Printer counter data clear
6
Activity report TX/RX count clear
*1: Document data stored in memory
*2: Program key
3 Press the Enter key.

48

Hook up alarm
1 Enter 48 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents

Setting for hook


up alarm which
indicates internal/
external handset
is hung on.

Not alarm
Alarm

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-17

354
354-1
SW No.
49

Description
Dial/busy tone detect (Line standard application
pending)
1 Enter 49 with the numeric keys.

Remark
Setting for dial or
busy tone
detection.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2

Contents
Busy tone detection on, other tone detection off
Observe the regulation
All tone detection off

3 Press the Enter key.


51

1 meter jam
1 Enter 51 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
3

Contents
OFF
1m
2m
3m

Setting for 1
meter jam which
means if
document
exceeds 1 m, 2
m, 3 m jam is
judged.

3 Press the Enter key.


52

Print position (vertical)


1 Enter 52 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
|
5
|
8

Contents
0 mm
1 mm
|
5 mm
|
8 mm

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-18

Setting for
vertical position
of print start. (by
1mm step)
(see page 3-344)

354-1
354
SW No.
53

Description
Print position (horizontal)
1 Enter 53 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
|
5
|
8

Contents
0 mm
1 mm
|
5 mm
|
8 mm

Remark
Setting for
horizontal
position of print
start. (by 1mm
step)
(see page 3-346)

3 Press the Enter key.


54

Buzzer on or off
1 Enter 54 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
Buzzer OFF
Buzzer ON

3 Press the Enter key.


55

CNG tone
1 Enter 55 with the numeric keys.

CNG tone for


manual dialing.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
OFF
ON

3 Press the Enter key.


56

Acoustic monitor
1 Enter 56 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for
acoustic monitor
on or off.

Contents
OFF
ON (Phase A - E)

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-19

354

This page is intentionally left blank.

3-2-20

354-1
354
SW No.
59

Remark

Description

Special speed (abbreviated protocol) communication


1 Enter 59 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
3

TX
Not special speed
Special speed
Not special speed
Special speed

Setting for
special speed
communication.

RX
Special speed
Special speed
Not special speed
Not special speed

3 Press the Enter key.

61

Class 1 mode
1 Enter 61 with the numeric keys.

Setting for class


1 mode.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
OFF
ON

3 Press the Enter key.

62

Class 1 report
1 Enter 62 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for print


condition of class
1 report.

Contents
Not print
Print

3 Press the Enter key.

63

RX priority
1 Enter 63 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
FAX
PC

Sets whether to
print the received
data with the
FAX or capture
into the PC as
the image data.

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-21
3-2-20

354
354-1
SW No.
66

Description
Fax number in report
1 Enter 66 with the numeric keys.

Remark
Select CSI/NSF
or actual number.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.


Setting
0
1
2

Contents
CSI/NSF/BLANK
Actual number (name or number)
Actual number (only number)

3 Press the Enter key.


68

Broadcast report print


1 Enter 68 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for print


condition of
broadcast report.

Contents
Not print
Print after broadcast

3 Press the Enter key.


69

Multi-polling report print


1 Enter 69 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for print


condition of
multi-polling
report.

Contents
Not print
Print after multi-polling

3 Press the Enter key.


73

Memory entry report


1 Enter 73 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
Not print
Print with every entry

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-22
3-2-20-1

Sets whether not


to print when
another
document is
entered in
memory when
transmission has
been reserved.

354-1
354
SW No.
75

Description
Information code
1 Enter 75 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Remark
Setting for print
of information
code.

Contents
Not print
Print (Prints the details of the error
in the TX report.)

3 Press the Enter key.


80

Canceled report print


1 Enter 80 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for print


condition of
canceled report.

Contents
Not print
Print after MEM, FILE clear by operation

3 Press the Enter key.


81

Error page redial


1 Enter 81 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0

Setting for error


page redial
condition.

Contents
Pattern 1 (If a transmission error occurs during
memory transmission, the line is cut off, then
transmission is repeated from the page during
which the error occurred.)
Pattern 2 (Even if a transmission error occurs
during memory transmission, the line is not cut
off and transmission continues ignoring (skipping
over) the page during which the error occurred.)

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-23
3-2-21

354
354-1
SW No.
82

Description
PABX ring detection
1 Enter 82 with the numeric keys.

Remark
Setting for PABX
ring detection.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.


Setting
0
1

Contents
Ring pattern is detected up to the outer area of
the PTT required.
Ring pattern is detected only by the area of the
PTT required.

3 Press the Enter key.


83

PABX dial tone detection


1 Enter 83 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2

Setting for PABX


dial tone
detection.

Contents
Not detect dial tone, but dial after fixed time.
Detect dial tone which is same to PSTN and start
dialing after detection.
Detect expanded PSTN dial tone and start dialing
after detection.

3 Press the Enter key.


84

PSTN dial tone detection


1 Enter 84 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0
1
2

Contents
Not detect dial tone, but dial after fixed time.
Detect dial tone which is same to PSTN and start
dialing after detection.
Detect expanded PSTN dial tone and start dialing
after detection.

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-24
3-2-22

Setting for PSTN


dial tone
detection. (PABX
mode)

354-1
354
SW No.
85

Description
Communication speed print
1 Enter 85 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Remark
Setting for
communication
speed print.

Contents
Not print
Print

3 Press the Enter key.


86

Communication speed/page display


1 Enter 86 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for
communication
speed/ page
display.

Contents
Not display
Display

3 Press the Enter key.


88

TX report print condition


1 Enter 88 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for TX
report print
condition when
redial.

Contents
TX report printed after each redialing
TX report printed after completion of set number
of redialings

3 Press the Enter key.


89

S-Fine copy/ S-Fine RX setting


1 Enter 89 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
0
1

Setting for super


fine copy/ super
fine RX.

Contents
OFF
ON

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-25
3-2-23

354
354-1
SW No.
90

Description
Sound signal check time
1 Enter 90 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
00
01
|
30

Remark
Setting for sound
signal check
time.

Contents
0 sec
1 sec
|
30 sec

3 Press the Enter key.


91

Time for detection of CNG


1 Enter 91 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
3
4

Setting for time


for detection of
CNG.

Contents
1 sec
2 sec
3 sec
4 sec
5 sec

3 Press the Enter key.


92

Time for calling an operator


1 Enter 92 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
3

Contents
10 sec
15 sec
20 sec
25 sec

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-26
3-2-24

Setting for time


for calling an
operator

354-1
354
SW No.
93

Description
Quasi ring volume
1 Enter 93 with the numeric keys.

Remark
Setting for quasi
ring volume.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.


Setting
0
1
2

Contents
Small
Normal
Big

3 Press the Enter key.


94

TX mode
1 Enter 94 with the numeric keys.

Setting for TX
mode.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Contents
ADF TX (Direct transmission)
Memory TX

3 Press the Enter key.


95

Modem control
1 Enter 95 with the numeric keys.

Setting for
modem control.

2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.


Setting
Contents
Equalizer freeze *1 OFF/Carrier check
0
1
Equalizer freeze ON/Carrier check
2
Equalizer freeze OFF/EQM check
3
Equalizer freeze ON/EQM check
*1: The equalizer freeze corrects for carrier data distortion and
retains that correction value.
3 Press the Enter key.
96

1st image print


1 Enter 96 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1

Setting for 1st


image print
(transmission
report).

Contents
OFF (Not print)
ON (Print)

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-27
3-2-25

354
354-1
SW No.
97

Description
Printing system time out
1 Enter 97 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.

Setting
0
1
2
|
31

Contents
No time out
10 sec
20 sec
|
310 sec

Remark
Setting for
Printing system
time out.
If print data is not
received from the
computer for the
set time, the line
with the
computer is
forcibly cut off.

3 Press the Enter key.


98

Number of ringing for TAD


1 Enter 98 with the numeric keys.
2 Enter the setting with the numeric keys.
Setting
01
02
|
11

Contents
1 time
2 times
|
11 times

3 Press the Enter key.

3-2-28
3-2-26

Setting for
number of
ringing.
In the case of
TAD mode,
number of ringing
to received state
is set.
Number of
ringing is set
from 1 to 11 by 1
step.

354-1
354

3-2-3 Test mode

USER MODE

12 / 15

'96

12 : 00
100%

Enter the service mode.


(Refer to 3-2-2 Service mode, page 3-2-2)

SERVICE MODE

12 / 15

'96

12 : 00
100%

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

TEST MODE

OT

Press the Onetouch key No.1.

Press the Onetouch key No.2.

Press the Onetouch key No.4.

Reading test
mode

Press the Onetouch key No.3.

Press the Onetouch key No.5.

Modem test
mode

Aging test mode

Press the Onetouch key No.6.

Print test mode

ADF
adjustment
mode

*This mode has


three adjustment
modes (No.1-No.3).
Do not change
these mode setting.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

3-2-29
3-2-27

354
( 1 ) Reading test mode
* In this mode, check the contact image sensor (CIS) operation.

SERVICE MODE

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

TEST MODE
OT

Press the One-touch


key No.1.

Reading test mode

SCANNER ON

Press the Stop/Reset key.

3-2-30
3-2-28

SCANNER LED ON

* The exposure lamp


(LED) of the contact image sensor lights.

354
( 2 ) Modem test mode
* In this mode, check the on-board modem operation (output test for the DTMF signal assigned each numeric key and tonal signal).

SERVICE MODE

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

TEST MODE
OT

Press the One-touch


key No.2.

Modem test mode

MODEM TEST
9600 BPS (V29)

9600bps (V29) signal


output.

Press the One-touch


key (1-8) corresponding
to the desired output
signal.

The signal corresponding to the pressed Onetouch key is outputted.

Refer to Table 1, next


page .

MODEM TEST

Outputted signal name


appears here. (Refer to
Table 1, next page.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

3-2-31
3-2-29

354
Table 1
Output signal
One-touch key
No.1.
One-touch key
No.2.
One-touch key
No.3.
One-touch key
No.4.
One-touch key
No.5.
One-touch key
No.6.
One-touch key
No.7.
One-touch key
No.8.

1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3

9600 bps (V29)


7200 bps (V29)
4800 bps (V27ter)
2400 bps (V27ter)
300 bps
1100 Hz
2100 Hz
1209 Hz
1336 Hz
1477 Hz
1633 Hz
697 Hz
770 Hz
852 Hz
941 Hz
PB signal *2
No signal (DP ON)
No signal (DP OFF)
14400 bps (V17)
12000 bps (V17)
9600 bps (V17)
7200 bps (V17)
14400 bps (V33)
12000 bps (V33)

Display
9600 bps (V29)
7200 bps (V29)
4800 bps
2400 bps
300 bps
1100 Hz
2100 Hz
Tone 1209 Hz
Tone 1336 Hz
Tone 1477 Hz
Tone 1633 Hz
Tone 697 Hz
Tone 770 Hz
Tone 852 Hz
Tone 941 Hz
PB (x) *2
NO SIGNAL
DP OFF
14400 bps (V17)
12000 bps (V17)
9600 bps (V17)
7200 bps (V17)
14400 bps (V33)
12000 bps (V33)

*1: Every time pressing each One-touch key, the signal is outputted in the order described in the Table 1.
For example, when pressing the One-touch key No.5, the signal is outputted as
follows.
Press the One-touch key No.5.
770 Hz signal is outputted. (Message display: TONE 770 Hz)
Press the One-touch key No.5.
852 Hz signal is outputted. (Message display: TONE 852 Hz)
Press the One-touch key No.5.
941 Hz signal is outputted. (Message display: TONE 941 Hz)

*2: Pressing the numeric keys (0 to 9), key and # key output DTMF signal corresponding to the key (s).
The character corresponding to the pressed key appears on the message display.

3-2-32
3-2-30

354
( 3 ) Print test mode
* In this mode, output the test chart (see figure 3-2-1).

SERVICE MODE

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

TEST MODE
OT

Press the One-touch


key No.3.

Use the numeric keys


to enter the desired test
chart No. (0 or 1).

TEST CHART No. 0


0 -1 / ENTER / START

Press the Enter key.

Use the numeric keys to


MASK CONTROL 0

enter the desired mask


0 -1 / ENTER / START
control No. (0 or 1).
0: Not Mask *1
1: Mask
Press the Enter key.
*1 If 0 (Not Mask) is selected, the test chart
image is printed on the
non-image area.
Use the numeric keys
to enter the desired
print count No. (0 to 9).
PRINT COUNT
0

0 -9 / ENTER / START
Press the Enter key.

Press the Start key.

TEST REPORT PRINT

Press the Stop/Reset key.

PRINTING

The test chart is outputted at


the selected condition.

3-2-33
3-2-31

354

Test chart No.0

Test chart No.1


Figure 3-2-1 Test chart

3-2-34
3-2-32

354
( 4 ) Aging test mode
* In this mode, check the printer section, document feed/image reading section
(ADF) operation.

SERVICE MODE

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

Press the Stop/Reset key.

TEST MODE

OT

Press the One-touch


key No.4.

CONT OPERATION
ENTER / START

Press the Enter key.


SCANNER
ENTER / START
SCANNER ON

*1

Press the Enter key.

SCANNER ON

Press the Start key.

B
A

3-2-35
3-2-33

354

Press the Stop/Reset key.

PRINTER ON

Yes

*2

No

Scanner ON?

D
ENGINE & SCANNER
ENTER / STOP

ENGINE
ENTER / STOP

Press the Enter key.

SCANNER OFF

Press the Enter key.

SCANNER ON

*1

*1 The ADF motor starts to drive, the exposure lamp for the contact image sensor
lights.
The printer section, document feed/image reading section (ADF) operates a
simulated document reading. In this time, when a document is on the document
table, the document is fed.
*2 The main motor comes on, the printer section operates a simulated printing. In
this time, when a paper is in the paper feed cassette, the paper is fed.

3-2-36
3-2-34

354-1
354
( 5 ) ADF adjustment mode
* In this mode, perform each adjustment for the document feed/image reading section (ADF).

SERVICE MODE

Press the Function key


seven times.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Press the Enter key.

TEST MODE

TEST MODE
OT

Press the One-touch


key No.5.

Adjusting the document leading edge


ADF ADJ
XXXXX

registration timing (see page 3-3-48).


MODE01 0 - 9 / ENTER

Press the Enter key.

Adjusting the document trailing edge


XXXXX
ADF ADJ
registration timing (see page 3-3-50).
MODE02 0 - 9 / ENTER

Press the Enter key.

Adjusting the document reading start


XXXXX
ADF ADJ
position (see page 3-3-52).
MODE03 0 - 9 / ENTER

Press the Enter key.

Adjusting the document reading


density threshold (see page 3-3-43).

XXXXX
ADF ADJ
MODE04 0 - 9 / ENTER

Press the Enter key.

Do not change the setting of this ADF ADJ


XXXXX
mode other than the setting at the
MODE05 0 - 9 / ENTER
factory setting.

Press the Enter key.

3-2-37
3-2-35

354

3-3-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly


Precautions
Always unplug the power cord before starting disassembly and assembly operations.
Disconnect all connectors connected to this machine (computer connection cable,
telephone line, etc.) before starting these operations.
Remove the imaging unit, paper feed tray, document table, and eject tray before
starting these operations.
During disassembly, if wires are fastened with binding bands, you may cut these
bands as necessary, but if you cut them, always fasten those wires and return them to
their original positions during assembly.
When handling PCBs, do not touch the PCB connection sections with your bare hands
or damage them.
When ICs are installed on a PCB, do not touch with bare hands or with any object that
might carry a static electric charge.
When replacing the fixing thermostat, always use the specified parts. Never use wire
or the like instead of the specified thermostat. It can damage the machine and cause
accidents.
Always use the tester indicated below when measuring voltage.
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman 3030: Capable of measuring RMS values.
Beckman 330: Capable of measuring RMS values.
Beckman DM45
Beckman DM850: Capable of measuring RMS values.
Fluke 8060A: Capable of measuring RMS values.
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C

3-3-1

354

3-3-2 Outer covers


Follow the procedures below to detach the outer covers to perform disassembly.
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the rear cover and right cover
<Procedure>
1. Open the main body of the machine.
2. Remove the four screws, then remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the screw, then remove the memory board cover.
* If the optional memory board is installed, remove it.
4. Remove the two screws, remove the square hole on the right cover (section
indicated by round mark in the figure) from the projection on the main body of the
machine, then remove the right cover.

Right cover

Rear cover

Memory board
cover

Figure 3-3-1

3-3-2

354
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the left cover and left front cover
<Procedure>
1. Remove the rear cover. (See page 3-3-2.)
2. Remove the three screws, remove the three square holes on the left cover (sections
indicated by round marks in the figure) from the projections on the main body of the
machine, then remove the left cover.
3. Remove the two screws, then remove the left front cover.

Left front
cover

Left cover

Figure 3-3-2

3-3-3

354
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the upper cover
<Procedure>
1. Remove the operation unit. (See page 3-3-42.)
2. Open the main body of the machine.
3. Remove the two screws, free the two hooks on the upper cover (sections indicated
by round marks in the figure) from the upper frame, then remove the upper cover.

Upper cover

Figure 3-3-3
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the base lid
<Procedure>
1. Remove the five screws, then remove the base lid.

Base lid

Figure 3-3-4

3-3-4

354

3-3-3 Paper feed section


( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the paper feed pulley.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF housing. (See page 3-3-12.)
2. Remove the sensor stay fastened to the upper frame with double-sided adhesive
tape.
3. Remove the terminal cover. (See page 3-3-8.)
Sensor stay

Bushing

Grounding
plate

Figure 3-3-5

3-3-5

354
4. Remove the stop ring, then remove the shim, feed clutch, pin, and bushing.
5. Remove the paper feed pulley shaft from the bushing on the machine right side,
then remove the paper feed pulley shaft from the upper frame.
* During refitting, be careful not to bend the grounding plate when inserting the paper
feed pulley shaft into the machine right side bushing. (See figure 3-3-5.)
6. Remove the paper feed collar and pin.
7. Remove the two paper feed collars.
8. Remove the stop ring, then remove the pin and paper feed pulley.

Paper feed
pulley shaft
Stop ring
Paper feed
pulley

Pin

Paper feed collars


Paper feed collar
Pin

Bushing

Feed clutch
Shim

Pin
Stop ring

Figure 3-3-6
9. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-6

354
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pad
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the paper feed pad.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the paper feed pulley. (See page 3-3-5.)
2. Push the paper feed pad hinge sections to the inside as direction of the arrow and
remove the paper feed pad from the upper frame as shown in the figure.

Paper feed pad

Spring

Paper feed pad

Figure 3-3-7
3. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-7

354
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the lower feed roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the lower feed roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the screw, then remove the terminal cover.
* When refitting, the open/close strap hook section (section indicated by the round
mark in the figure) must be fastened by being securely installed on the projection of
the terminal cover.

Terminal cover

Open/close strap

Figure 3-3-8

3-3-8

354
2. Remove the left and right crimp-style springs, then remove the lower feed roller.
* When removing or refitting, be careful not to bend the grounding plate.
3. Remove the bushings and shims from both ends of the lower feed roller.

Shim

Lower feed roller


Bushing

Grounding plate

Crimp-style spring

Lower feed roller

Crimp-style spring

Figure 3-3-9
4. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-9

354
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the upper feed roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the upper feed roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the lower feed roller. (See page 3-3-8.)
2. Remove the E ring, then remove the upper feed roller gear and bushing.
3. Remove the upper feed roller from the bushing on the right side of the machine.
4. Remove the bushing, then remove the upper feed roller.
* When removing or refitting, be careful not to bend the grounding plate.

Upper feed
roller gear

E ring
Bushing

Bushing

Grounding plate

Upper feed roller

Figure 3-3-10
5. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-10

354-1

3-3-4 Document feed and image reading sections (ADF)


( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF guide
Follow the procedure below to detach the ADF guide to perform disassembly.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the operation unit. (See page 3-3-42.)
2. Remove the screw, then remove the grounding wire from the ADF guide.
3. Disconnect the 3-pin connectors for the ADF timing switch and document detection
switch.
4. Remove the ferrite core installed on the wire. Pull out the grounding wire, the wires
for the two 3-pin connectors disconnected, and the wires for the connector
connected to the operation unit from the hole on the ADF guide in the direction of
the arrow.
5. Remove the retainer pin, remove the hinge for the ADF guide from the hole on the
ADF housing, then remove the ADF guide.
Grounding wire

Ferrite core

ADF guide
Hinge

3-pin connectors

Retainer pin

Figure 3-3-11

3-3-11

354
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF housing
Follow the procedure below to detach the ADF housing to perform disassembly.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF guide. (See page 3-3-11.)
2. Remove the contact image sensor (CIS). (See page 3-3-13.)
3. Remove the upper cover. (See page 3-3-4.)
4. Free the wires from the two cord clamp sections for the ADF housing.
5. Remove the screw, then remove the two grounding wires.
6. Remove the two screws, then remove the ADF housing as shown in the figure.
* When refitting, insert the two claws for the ADF housing into the bottom side of the
upper frame and check that holes on the ADF housing are firmly placed into pins for
the upper frame. (sections indicated by round marks in the figure)

ADF housing

Grounding wires

Cord clamp
sections

Upper frame

ADF housing

Figure 3-3-12

3-3-12

354
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the contact image sensor (CIS)
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the contact image sensor.
* During removing, if wires are fastened with binding bands, you may cut these bands
as necessary, but if you cut them, always fasten those wires and return them to their
original positions during refitting.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF guide. (See page 3-3-11.)
2. Insert flat-bladed screwdrivers or the like into three locations in the grooves on the
ADF guide, free the CIS retainer hooks, and pull the CIS retainer up and out, then
remove it from the ADF housing.
* When refitting, insert the two left and right claws for the CIS retainer securely into
the bottom side of the ADF housing (sections indicated with round marks in the
figure).
Hook
CIS retainer

Hooks

Claw

Claw

CIS retainer

Contact image
sensor
Grooves
ADF housing

Figure 3-3-13

3-3-13

354
3. Gently remove the contact image sensor from the ADF housing.
4. Disconnect the connector, then remove the contact image sensor.

Contact image sensor

Connector

Figure 3-3-14
5. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-14

354
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF pad
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the ADF pad.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF guide. (See page 3-3-11.)
2. Remove the two projections of the ADF guide from the square holes on the pad
plate spring, then remove the pad plate spring in the direction of the arrow.
3. Remove the ADF pad from the ADF guide.
ADF pad
Pad plate spring

ADF guide

Projections

Pad plate spring


Square
holes

Figure 3-3-15
4. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-15

354
( 5 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF paper feed roller and ADF conveying roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the ADF paper feed roller and ADF
conveying roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF housing. (See Page 3-3-12.)
2. Remove the E ring, then remove the ADF conveying gear 36 from the ADF conveying
roller.
3. Remove the idle gear 16/37 from the drive pin for the ADF housing.
4. Remove the E ring, then remove the ADF paper feed gear 51 and ADF paper feed
square spring from the ADF paper feed roller.
5. Remove one E ring each and shift the bushings that fastens the ADF conveying
roller and ADF paper feed roller in the direction of the arrows, then remove the ADF
conveying roller and ADF paper feed roller from the ADF housing.
* When refitting, be careful not to bend the grounding plate and check that each
bushing is firmly contacting the grounding terminal as shown in figure 3-3-17.
6. Remove the ADF paper feed roller and ADF conveying roller from the ADF housing.
7. Remove one bushing each from the ADF paper feed roller and ADF conveying roller.

ADF conveying
gear 36

E ring
Idle gear
16/37

ADF paper feed


square spring
E ring
ADF paper feed gear 51
E ring

E ring
Bushing
ADF housing

Bushing

ADF paper feed roller


ADF conveying roller

Figure 3-3-16

3-3-16

354

Bushing
Grounding terminal

Grounding terminal

Bushing

Figure 3-3-17
8. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-17

354
( 6 ) Detaching and refitting the ADF eject roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the ADF eject roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF housing. (See page 3-3-12.)
2. Remove the E ring, then remove the ADF conveying gear 36 from the ADF eject
roller.
3. Remove the E ring, shift the bushing that fastens the ADF eject roller in the direction
of the arrow, then remove ADF eject roller from the ADF housing.
* When refitting, be careful not to bend the grounding plate and check that the
bushing is firmly contacting the grounding terminal as shown in figure 3-3-19.
4. Remove the ADF eject roller from the ADF housing.
5. Remove the bushing from the ADF eject roller.
E ring
ADF conveying gear 36
E ring
ADF eject roller

Bushing

Figure 3-3-18
Bushing

Grounding
terminal

Figure 3-3-19
6. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-18

354-1

3-3-5 Optical section


( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the laser scanning unit
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the laser scanning unit.
* During removing, if wires are fastened with binding bands, you may cut these bands
as necessary, but if you cut them, always fasten those wires and return them to their
original positions during refitting.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the control PCB (See page 3-3-36.) and the high voltage transformer PCB
cover (See page 3-3-39.).
* However, when removing the control PCB, remove the two relay connectors without
removing CN6 and CN13 (sections indicated by round marks in the figure).
2. Remove the three ferrite cores installed on the wires.
3. Free the wires from the cord clamp sections of the main body of the machine.
Cord clamp sections

High voltage
transformer
PCB cover

Ferrite
core

Cord clamp
sections
Ferrite
core

Ferrite core
Control PCB

Relay connectors

Figure 3-3-20

3-3-19

354
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the power source PCB. (See page 3-3-40.)


Remove the two screws, then remove the cooling fan.
Remove the two screws, then remove the three grounding wires from the chassis.
Pull out the connector wires connected to the control PCB from the square hole in
the cooling fan rear side chassis.
Cooling fan
Square hole
Grounding wires

Grounding wire

Screw
Chassis
Screw

Figure 3-3-21

3-3-20

354
8. Remove the four terminals for the high voltage transformer PCB fastened to the
base. (See page 3-3-38.)
9. Remove the fixing unit. (See page 3-3-26, 3-3-27.)
10. Remove the upper cover. (See page 3-3-4.)
11. Remove the screw, then remove the open/close strap (machine left side) from the
upper frame.
12. Remove the retainer pin, then remove the open/close strap (machine right side)
from the base.

Open/close strap

Open/close strap

Retainer pin

Figure 3-3-22

3-3-21

354
13. Open the machine main body about 90 and remove the four screws for the base.
14. Close the machine main body, slide the base to the rear side, remove the
projections for the base from the two hook sections for the chassis (sections
indicated with round marks in the figure), then remove the base from the chassis
together with the upper frame.
* When removing or refitting, be careful that the three grounding brushes (sections
indicated with round marks in figure 3-3-24) are not bent.

Base
Chassis

Figure 3-3-23

3-3-22

354
15. Remove the three screws, then remove the laser scanning unit.

Laser scanning unit

Figure 3-3-24
16. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-23

354

3-3-6 Transfer section


( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the transfer roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the ADF housing. (See page 3-3-12.)
2. Remove the two hooks for the left and right transfer roller bushing each from the
upper frame, then remove the transfer roller.

Hooks

Transfer roller
bushing

Transfer roller
Transfer roller
bushing

Figure 3-3-25

3-3-24

354
3. Remove the transfer roller pulleys, transfer roller bushings, and transfer springs
from the transfer roller as shown in the figure.
Transfer spring

Transfer roller pulley


Transfer roller bushing

Transfer spring
Transfer roller

Transfer roller bushing


Transfer roller pulley

Figure 3-3-26
4. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-25

354

3-3-7 Fixing section


( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermistor
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing thermistor.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the base lid. (See page 3-3-4.)
2. Disconnect the connector for the fixing thermistor connected to CN18 on the control
PCB, and pass the wire to the square hole for the chassis.
Control PCB

Square hole

CN18

Figure 3-3-27
3. Remove the rear cover and right cover. (See page 3-3-2.)
4. Remove the left cover and left front cover. (See page 3-3-3.)
5. Pull out the open/close spring in the direction of the arrow A and remove it from the
fastening section.
6. Remove the three screws for the safety switch mount.
7. Remove the pin for the base (section indicated with round mark in the figure) from
the hole for the safety switch mount, then remove the safety switch mount as shown
in the figure.

Open/close spring

Safety switch mount

Figure 3-3-28

3-3-26

Fastening section

354
8. Disconnect the two 1-pin connectors for the fixing heater.
* When connecting the two 1-pin connectors for the fixing heater, connect as
indicated by the mark on the base (with the white wire connector on the top and the
black wire connector on the bottom).
9. Remove the screw and the retainer pin, then remove the fixing unit as shown in the
figure.
* When removing or refitting, be careful not to bend the fixing unit left bottom
grounding brush.
* When refitting, check that the two fixing unit claws (sections indicated with round
marks in the figure) are firmly inserted into the chassis hook sections.
Retainer pin

2
1

Fixing unit
1-pin connectors

Grounding brush

Figure 3-3-29

3-3-27

354
10. Remove the screw, then remove the fixing thermistor.
* When refitting, firmly insert the fixing thermistor projection into the fixing housing
groove.

Fixing
thermistor

Projection

Groove

Fixing housing

Figure 3-3-30
11. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-28

354
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing heater.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the safety switch mount. (See page 3-3-26.)
2. Remove the two screws, then remove the fixing unit upper housing as shown in the
figure.

2
1

Fixing unit upper housing

Figure 3-3-31

3-3-29

354
3. Remove the two screws for the fixing heater, then remove the fixing heater together
with the heat roller.
4. Pull out the fixing heater from the heat roller.
Fixing heater
Heat roller

Heat roller

Fixing heater

Figure 3-3-32
5. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.
* When refitting the fixing heater, be careful about the following points.
Install facing in the correct direction.
100V: Install with the black paint side (section indicated in the figure) on the right.
120V: Install with the indigo paint side (section indicated in the figure) on the right.
230V: Install with the red paint side (section indicated in the figure) on the right.
Do not touch the fixing heater glass section with bare hands.

Fixing heater

Figure 3-3-33

3-3-30

354
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the heat roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the heat roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the fixing heater. (See page 3-3-29.)
2. Remove the heat roller gear, then remove the left and right heat roller bushings.
* When refitting the heat roller, hook the separation claws on the heat roller.
Heat roller bushing

Heat roller

Heat roller gear

Heat roller bushing

Figure 3-3-34
3. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-31

354
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the press roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the press roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the fixing unit upper housing. (See page 3-3-29.)
2. Open the fixing unit upper housing left and right press roller bushing hook sections
(sections indicated by round marks in the figure) to the outside and remove the
press roller together with the press roller bushing.
3. Remove the press roller bushings and press springs from the press roller.

Press roller

Press roller

Press roller bushing

Press
spring

Figure 3-3-35
4. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-32

354
( 5 ) Detaching and refitting the separation claw
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the separation claw.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the heat roller. (See page 3-3-31.)
2. Remove the one spring each, then remove the two separation claws.
* When the separation claws are installed, they must hook on the heat roller.

Separation claw

Spring

Figure 3-3-36
3. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-33

354
( 6 ) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermostat 1 and 2
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing thermostat 1 and 2.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the heat roller. (See page 3-3-31.)
2. Remove the two screws, then remove the fixing thermostat 1 and 2.
* When refitting the fixing thermostats, always install the fixing thermostat 1 (150C/
302F) on the right side and the fixing thermostat 2 (145C/293F) on the left side.

Fixing thermostat 1
(150C/302F)

Fixing thermostat 2
(145C/293F)

Figure 3-3-37
3. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-34

354-1
( 7 ) Detaching and refitting the eject roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the eject roller.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the fixing unit upper housing. (See page 3-3-29.)
2. Remove the stop ring, then remove the fixing idle gear.
3. Slide the eject roller in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the fixing unit.

Eject roller

Eject roller

Fixing idle gear

Stop ring

Figure 3-3-38
4. After cleaning or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-35

354-1

3-3-8 PCBs
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the control PCB (CPCB)
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the control PCB.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the base lid. (See Page 3-3-4.)
2. Disconnect all the connectors connected to the control PCB.
3. If the expansion memory (SIMM) is installed, remove the expansion memory
(SIMM) from the control PCB.
4. Remove the eight screws, then remove the control PCB.
Control PCB

Figure 3-3-39
5. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-36

354
( 2 ) Detaching and refitting the NCU PCB
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the NCU PCB.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the rear cover. (See page 3-3-2.)
2. Remove the left cover. (See page 3-3-3.)
3. Remove the three screws and the connector (CN1), then remove the NCU PCB.

CN1

NCU PCB

Figure 3-3-40
4. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-37

354
( 3 ) Detaching and refitting the high voltage transformer PCB
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the rear cover. (See page 3-3-2.)
2. Remove the right cover. (See page 3-3-2.)
3. Remove the screws for each terminal, then remove the four terminals for the high
voltage transformer PCB.
* When refitting, be careful to install each terminal in the correct position.
4. Cut off the binding band.
White
Gray
Red

Binding band
White
(Yellow tube with
the terminal crimp section)

Figure 3-3-41

3-3-38

354-1
5. Remove the base lid. (See page 3-3-4.)
6. Remove the control PCB. (See page 3-3-36.)
7. Slide the high voltag transformer PCB cover in the direction of the arrow and
remove it from the hook of the chassis, and then remove the high voltage
transformer PCB cover from the machine.

High
voltage
transformer
PCB cover

Hook

Figure 3-3-42-1
8. Remove the two screws and the connector (CN1), then remove the high voltage
transformer PCB.
CN1

High voltage
transformer PCB

Figure 3-3-42-2
9. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-39

354
( 4 ) Detaching and refitting the power source PCB
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the power source PCB.
* During removing, if wires are fastened with binding bands, you may cut these bands
as necessary, but if you cut them, always fasten those wires and return them to their
original positions during refitting.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the rear cover and right cover. (See page 3-3-2.)
2. Remove the left cover. (See page 3-3-3.)
3. Remove the eight screws, then remove the rear cover mount.

Rear cover mount

Figure 3-3-43

3-3-40

354
4. Remove the two 1-pin connectors for the power source PCB connected to the fixing
heater.
* When connecting the 1-pin connectors for the fixing heater, connect as indicated by
the mark on the base (with the white wire connector on the top and the black wire
connector on the bottom).
5. Remove the two screws and the connector (CN1), then remove the power source
PCB.

black

white

1-pin connectors

CN1
power source PCB

Figure 3-3-44
6. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-41

354
( 5 ) Detaching and refitting the operation unit
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the operation unit PCB.
<Procedure>
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Remove the two screws for the operation unit .
3. Free the square holes on the operation unit from the three projections on the ADF
guide (sections indicated by round marks in the figure), then remove the operation
unit slowly.
4. Disconnect the connector (CN1) for the operation unit PCB, then remove the
operation unit.
Operation unit

Connector

Figure 3-3-45
5. After checking or replacing, refit all removed parts.

3-3-42

354

3-3-9 Adjustment
( 1 ) Adjusting the document reading density threshold
Preform this adjustment when the image density is not correct, replacing the contact
image sensor (CIS) or control PCB (CPCB).
<Procedure>
Start

Enter the service mode.

See page 3-2-2.

Make a test copy.

Is the test copy image


density correct ?

Yes
Exit the service mode.

No
Enter the test mode.

End
See page 3-2-27.

Select the Mode No.4 (Adjusting The current setting will appear.
the document reading density
ADF ADJ
00029
threshold) of ADF adjustment
MODE 04 0 - 9/ENTER
mode. (Press the one-touch key
No.5 and press the enter key
three times.)

Change the setting with the numeric keys.


The test copy image is too light:
Increase the setting.
The test copy image is too dark:
Decrease the setting.

* Default setting: 00029


When changing the setting, set
the setting within the default
setting 2 (27 - 31) range .
When setting other than this
range, it may cause the image
error.

Press the Enter key twice.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

3-3-43

354
( 2 ) Adjusting the paper leading edge registration timing
Preform this adjustment when the leading edge margin (image writing start position of
sub scanning direction) is not correct or replacing the control PCB (CPCB).
<Procedure>
Start

Enter the service mode.

See page 3-2-2.

Enter the test mode.

See page 3-2-27.

Execute print test mode and print


See "(3) Print test mode"

out the test chart No.0.


on page 3-2-31.

Is the leading edge


margin on the test
chart correct ?

Yes
Exit the test mode.

No
Press the Stop/Reset key

Enter the memory switch setting


mode (See page 3-2-3).

Exit the service mode.

End

Enter "52" with the numeric keys The current setting will appear.
and press the Enter key.
PRINT POS. (V)
4
0 - 8/ENTER
Change the setting with the numeric keys.
The leading edge margin is long
(Example 1):
Decrease the setting .
The leading edge margin is short
(Example 2):
Increase the setting.

Press the Enter key.

Enter "1" with the numeric key and


press the Enter key.

3-3-44

* Setting range: 0 - 8
Default setting: 4
Amount of change for 1 step: 1mm

354

Example 1

Example 2
Standard setting of leading edge margin: 3 mm 2.5 mm

Figure 3-3-46

3-3-45

354
( 3 ) Adjusting the center registration
Perform this adjustment when there is not align between the center of the printing image
and the center of the document image (The printing image is shifted toward the right or
the left side: image writing start position of main scanning direction is not correct) or
replacing the control PCB (CPCB).
<Procedure>
Start

Enter the service mode.

See page 3-2-2.

Enter the test mode.

See page 3-2-27.

Execute print test mode and print


See "(3) Print test mode"

out the test chart No.0.


on page 3-2-31.

Is the printing image


shifted toward the right or
left side ?

No

Exit the test mode.


Yes

Exit the service mode.

Press the Stop/Reset key.


End
Enter the memory switch setting
mode (See page 3-2-3).

Enter "53" with the numeric keys The current setting will appear.
and press the Enter key.
PRINT POS. (H)
4
0 - 8/ENTER
Change the setting with the numeric keys.
The printing image is shifted toward the right side (Example 1):
Decrease the setting .
The printing image is shifted toward the left side (Example 2):
Increase the setting.

Press the Enter key.

Enter "1" with the numeric key and


press the Enter key.

3-3-46

* Setting range: 0 - 8
Default setting: 4
Amount of change for 1 step: 1 mm

354

Correct image

Example 1

Example 2

Figure 3-3-47

3-3-47

354
( 4 ) Adjusting the document leading edge registration timing
Preform this adjustment when the leading edge of the document image disappears or a
black line appears at the leading edge of the printing image (the reading start position of
the sub scanning direction for the document image is not correct) or replacing the
control PCB (CPCB).
* Be sure to adjust the paper leading edge registration timing (see page 3-3-44) before
this adjustment.
<Procedure>
Start

Is the paper leading


edge registration timing (leading
edge margin) correct ?

No

Adjust the paper registration leading


edge timing (see page 3-3-44).

Yes
Enter the service mode.

See page 3-2-2.

Make a test copy.

Does the leading


edge of the document image
disappear or a black line appear
at the leading edge of the
printing image ?

Yes
Enter the test mode.

No

Exit the service mode.

End

See page 3-2-27.

Select the Mode No.1 (Adjusting The current setting will appear.
the document leading edge regADF ADJ
00410
istration timing) of ADF adjustMODE 01 0 - 9/ENTER
ment mode. (Press the onetouch key No.5)

3-3-48

354

A
Change the setting with the numeric keys.
The leading edge of the document image disappears (Example 1):
Decrease the setting .
A black line appears at the leading edge of the printing image
(Example 2):
Increase the setting.

Press the Enter key five times.

* Default setting: 00410


Changing the setting by 15 moves the
reading start position for the document
image by 1 mm.
* When changing the setting, set the setting within the default setting 100 (310
- 510) range.
When setting other than this range, it
may cause the image error.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Document

Example 1

Example 2

Figure 3-3-48

3-3-49

354
( 5 ) Adjusting the document trailing edge registration timing
Preform this adjustment when the trailing edge of the document image disappears or a
black line appears at the trailing edge of the printing image (the reading end position of
the sub scanning direction for the document image is not correct) or replacing the
control PCB (CPCB).
<Procedure>
Start

Enter the service mode.

See page 3-2-2.

Make a test copy.

Does the trailing


edge of the document
image disappear or a black line
appear at the trailing edge
of the printing
image ?
Yes
Enter the test mode.

No

Exit the service mode.

End
See page 3-2-27.

Select the Mode No.2 (Adjusting The current setting will appear.
document trailing edge registraADF ADJ
00280
tion timing) of ADF adjustment
MODE 02 0 - 9/ENTER
mode. (Press the one-touch key
No.5 and press the Enter key)

3-3-50

354

A
Change the setting with the numeric keys.
The trailing edge of the document image disappears (Example 1):
Increase the setting.
A black line appears at the trailing edge of the printing image
(Example 2):
Decrease the setting .

Press the Enter key four times.

* Default setting: 00280


Changing the setting by 25 moves the
reading end position for the document
image by 1 mm.
* When changing the setting, set the setting within the default setting 150 (130
- 430) range.
When setting other than this range, it
may cause the image error.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

Document

Example 1

Example 2

Figure 3-3-49

3-3-51

354
( 6 ) Adjusting the document reading start position (main scanning direction)
Preform this adjustment when a black line appears at the left side of the printing image
(the start position of the main scanning direction for the document image is not correct)
or replacing the control PCB (CPCB).
* Be sure to adjust the center registration (see page 3-3-46) before this adjustment.
<Procedure>
Start

Is the center registration


correct ?

No

Adjust the center registration (see


page 3-3-46).

Yes
Enter the service mode.

See page 3-2-2.

Make a test copy.

Does a black line


appear at the left side of
the printing image ?
(Example 1)

Yes
Enter the test mode.

No

Exit the service mode.

End
See page 3-2-27.

Select the Mode No.3 (Adjusting The current setting will appear.
document reading start position)
ADF ADJ
00002
of ADF adjustment mode. (Press
MODE 03 0 - 9/ENTER
the one-touch key No.5 and press
the Enter key twice)

3-3-52

354

A
Increase the setting with the numeric keys.

Press the Enter key three times.

Press the Stop/Reset key.

* Default setting: 00002


Changing the setting by 10 moves the
start position for the document image
by 1 mm.
* When changing the setting, set the setting within 2 - 50 range.
When setting other than this range, it
may cause the image error.

Document

Example 1

Figure 3-3-50

3-3-53

354-1
354

3-4-1 Replacing the control PCB


When replacing the control PCB, perform the following procedures.
<Procedure>
Before replacing
Perform the following procedures, verify the settings of the user setting items, memory
switch setting items and test mode adjustment settings which must be reentered after
replacement.
1. Print out the dial list.
2. Enter the service mode.
3. Print out the preset list.
* Print out the preset list with the same procedure as the user mode.
4. Enter the test mode.
5. Execute the ADF adjustment mode items and record the settings.
Mode No.

Contents

1
2
3
4
5

Document leading edge registration timing setting


Document trailing edge registration timing setting
Document reading start position setting
Document reading density threshold setting
(Do not change the setting of this mode other than the
setting at the factory setting.)

6. Unplug the power plug.


7. Replace the control PCB.
* Replace the control PCB (CPCB) following the procedure for (1) Detaching and
refitting the control PCB (CPCB) on page 3-3-36.
After replacing
8. Connect the power plug.
9. Enter the service mode.
10. Execute the memory switch setting No.46 to initialize all data. (See page 3-2-17)
11. Reset and reregister all the listed items in accordance with the contents listed on
the preset list printed out in step 3.
12. Enter the test mode.
13. Execute the ADF adjustment mode items and reenter the contents of the settings
recorded in step 5.
14. Exit the test mode.
15. Exit the service mode.
16. Reset and reregister all the contents in accordance with the content for the dial
list printed out in step 1.

3-4-1

354

3-4-2 Non-adjustable variable resistors (VR)


The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be
adjusted in the field.
Control PCB (CPCB): VR1, VR300
Power source PCB (PSPCB): VR1
High voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB): VR1 MC, VR2 DB1, VR3 DB1, VR4 DB2,
VR51 TC, VR81 Grid

3-4-2

354

3-5-1 Abnormality detection


This machine is equipped with abnormality detection functions. When an abnormality is
detected in this machine, the error indicator lights up, SYSTEM ERROR and a 3-digits
code indicating the contents of the abnormality (abnormality location) are displayed on
the message display.
When an abnormality is detected, this machine goes into abnormality detect status and
immediately stops and operations are disabled.
Code No.

Contents

Cause

001

Control PCB abnormality 1


An abnormality
occurred in the
fax memory circuit.

Defective control
PCB or fax optional memory
board

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the control PCB and optional
memory board, replace as if necessary.

Check procedures/corrective measures

002

Control PCB abnormality 2


An abnormality
occurred in the
fax memory circuit.

Defective control
PCB or fax optional memory
board

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the control PCB and optional
memory board, replace as if necessary.

003

Fixing unit abnormality


The fixing temperature does
not rise correctly.
Abnormally high
temperature
was detected in
the fixing unit.
(The fixing thermistor detection
temperature
reached 230C/
446F.)

Shorted fixing
thermistor

Measure the resistance of the fixing


thermistor and if it is 0 , replace the
fixing thermistor.

Defective fixing
thermistor installation

Check if the fixing thermistor is correctly installed and if it is not correctly


installed, install it correctly.

Broken fixing
thermistor

Check continuity for the fixing thermistor and if there is no continuity, replace the fixing thermistor.

Defective fixing
thermostat 1 and
2

Check continuity for the fixing thermostat 1 and 2 and if there are no continuity, replace the fixing thermostat 1
or 2.

Broken fixing
heater

Check continuity for the fixing heater


and if it is no continuity, replace the
fixing heater.

3-5-1

354
Code No.

Contents

Cause

003

Defective control
Fixing unit abPCB or power
normality
The fixing tem- source PCB
perature does
not rise correctly.
Abnormally high
temperature
was detected in
the fixing unit.
(The fixing thermistor detection
temperature
reached 230C/
446F.)

005

High voltage abnormality


(Main charger
leak detected)
The high voltage abnormality
detection signal
was detected
while the main
charger was on.

Main charger
leak

Check the main charger (imaging


unit). If it is soiled with toner or the
like, clean it.

Broken charger
wire

Check the charger wire and if it is broken, replace the imaging unit.

Defective high
voltage transformer PCB

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the high voltage transformer
PCB and replace it if necessary.

007

Control PCB ab- Defective control


PCB (CPU)
normality 3
An abnormality
occurred in the
control PCB
CPU.

012

Laser scanning
unit abnormality
1 (polygon motor abnormality)
The polygon
motor does not
rotate correctly.

3-5-2

Check procedures/corrective measures


After checking that there are no abnormality in the fixing thermistor, fixing
thermostat 1 and 2, and fixing heater,
then turn the power off, then on (unplug the power cord, then plug it in
again) and check if the abnormality is
detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the control PCB and power
source PCB, replace as if necessary.

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the control PCB and replace it if
necessary.

Poor contact in
the laser scanning unit connector

Check the connectors connected to


the laser scanning unit and if there is
any problem, reconnect the connectors properly.

Defective laser
scanning unit
(polygon motor
or polygon motor
control PCB)

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the laser scanning unit and replace it if necessary.

354
Code No.

Contents

Cause

013

Laser scanning
unit abnormality
2 (laser abnormality)
No laser beam
is generated
from the laser
diode.

Poor contact in
the laser scanning unit connector

Check procedures/corrective measures


Check the connectors connected to
the laser scanning unit and if there is
any problem, reconnect the connectors properly.

Defective laser
Turn the power off, then on (unplug
scanning unit (la- the power cord, then plug it in again)
ser diode PCB)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the laser scanning unit and replace it if necessary.

014

Control PCB ab- Defective control


normality 4
PCB
An abnormality
occurred in the
print memory
circuit.

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the control PCB and replace it if
necessary.

015

Control PCB abnormality 5


An abnormality
occurred in the
printing/printer
memory circuit.

Defective expansion memory


(SIMM) installation

Check if the expansion memory


(SIMM) is installed correctly and if
there is any problem, reinstall it correctly.

Defective control
PCB or expansion memory
(SIMM)

Turn the power off, then on (unplug


the power cord, then plug it in again)
and check if the abnormality is detected again.
If the abnormality is detected again,
check the control PCB and expansion
memory (SIMM), replace as if necessary.

3-5-3

354

3-5-2 Error code tables


When a communication error occurs, one of the following error codes will be printed out
on the corresponding Communication report as well as the Activity report. Refer to the
following tables for a more detailed explanation of the error.

CODE
I-10

TYPE OF ERROR
T1 time-out

CONTENTS
In transmission, the DIS signal from the other fax
for the first page was not detected during the T1
time (35.5 seconds).
In reception, the DCS (DTC, NSS, NSC) signal
from the other fax in response to the DIS signal
was not detected during the T1 time (35.5 seconds).

I-11

Other fax telephone number

In transmission, the ring back tone was detected,


then the absence of the ring back tone was detected, but the CED signal was not detected within
the CED check time.

I-20

Communications cancellation

In ADF transmission, after the dialing, the operator canceled ADF transmission.
In memory transmission, the operator canceled
memory transmission.
In reception, the operator canceled reception.

I-21

Transmission document
jam

The document jammed during ADF transmission.

No transmission document

ADF transmission was attempted, but the document was pulled out.

I-23

Polling reception impossible

Polling reception was attempted, but the memory


was full and there was a printer error, so polling
reception was impossible.

I-25

Memory file error

During memory transmission, a memory file error


made transmission impossible.

Memory full

During memory reception or confidential reception, the memory filled up and normal reception
became impossible.

I-29

File cancellation

In broadcast transmission, multi-polling reception,


or the like, the file was canceled with the file cancellation operation or the power was turned off
and transmission/reception became impossible.

I-30

Reception image defect

In reception, the reception image was judged to


be defective and the RTN signal was returned to
the transmitting fax.

3-5-4

354
CODE

TYPE OF ERROR

CONTENTS

I-32

Re-transmission impossible

In transmission, the RTN signal (reception image


defect) was received, but normal re-transmission
was impossible.

I-33

1 line more than five seconds

In reception, the EOL signal for a line (signal for


end of one line) was not detected in the reception
image data within five seconds.

I-35

EOR transmission

In ECM transmission, the transmission speed was


dropped to 2400 bps and re-transmission was attempted four times, but normal re-transmission
was still not possible.

I-36

EOR reception

In ECM reception, reception was tried until the


transmission speed had dropped down to 2400
bps, but there were still errors and they could not
be corrected.

I-40

Other fax reception impossible

In transmission, the reception machine bit of the


DIS signal received from the other fax was not
set, so the line was cut off. (The other fax had run
out of paper or its memory was full.)

I-41

No polling document

In polling reception, the transmission machine bit


of the DIS signal received from the other fax was
not set, so the line was cut off. (The other fax had
no polling transmission document.)

I-44

T5 time-out

In ECM transmission, the RNR-RR repeat time


(60 seconds) ran out.

I-45

No loop current

In transmission, the loop current was not detected


at the start of dialing.

I-46

Busy tone detection

In transmission, after dialing, the busy tone was


detected.

I-47

Dial tone detection

In transmission, at the start of dialing, the dial tone


was not detected.

I-48

No response from other


fax

In transmission, the CED signal was not detected


within the CED check time.

I-49

Busy tone detection before dialing

In transmission, the busy tone was detected before the start of dialing.

I-50

DCN signal reception

In transmission, the command received from the


other fax was the DCN signal or an unforeseen
command.

I-51

DCS or NSS/training
transmitted three times

In transmission, the DCS or NSS/training was


sent three times, but there was no response.

3-5-5

354
CODE

TYPE OF ERROR

CONTENTS

I-52

T6 time-out

In transmission, no response command was received from the other fax within six seconds.

I-53

Phase C carrier cutoff

In reception, the normal carrier cutoff was detected for six seconds or longer during image data
reception.

I-54

Post message transmitted In transmission, the post message was sent three
times, but there was no response.
three times

I-59

Multi-page T1 time-out

In transmission, the DIS signal from the other fax


for the second or subsequent page was not detected within T1.

I-60

Fall down out

The transmission speed fell down to 2400 bps, but


FTT was returned for TCF.

I-71

Password error

In closed-area polling transmission, the password


did not match, so transmission was not carried out
and the line was cut off.
In closed-area communications, the closed-area
ID did not match, so communications were not
carried out and the line was cut off.
In select reception, the last four digits of the telephone number for the other fax did not match the
last four digits for one-touch speed dialing (or automatic dialing), so reception was not carried out
and the line was cut off.
In confidential communications, the password did
not match, so communications were impossible
and the line was cut off.

I-72

Polling request from fax


manufactured by other
company

In polling transmission, there was a polling transmission request in a unique mode (NSC) from a
fax manufactured by another company, so polling
transmission was not possible.

I-75

No polling document set

In polling transmission, polling transmission was


requested when there was no polling transmission
document.

I-79

No function on other fax

Confidential transmission was attempted, but the


other fax does not have the confidential reception
function, so transmission was not carried out and
the line was cut off.
Closed-area communications were attempted, but
the other fax does not have the closed-area communications function, so communications were
not carried out and the line was cut off.

3-5-6

354
CODE
I-FE

TYPE OF ERROR
System error (1)

CONTENTS
In transmission, data sending did not end for
some reason, so normal transmission was impossible.
In transmission, there was a modem, DMA, or
other error, so normal transmission was impossible.

I-FF

System error (2)

In transmission, there was a coding or other error,


so normal transmission was impossible.
In transmission, data was made too slowly, so
transmission was impossible.
In reception, data conversion was too slow, so
normal reception was impossible.
In reception, there was a coding or other error, so
normal reception was impossible.

3-5-7

354

3-6-1 Image formation problems


<Contents>

(1) No printing (entirely white).

See page 3-6-3.


(5) A white line appears longitudinally.

See page 3-6-5.


(9) Black dots appear on the
printing.

See page 3-6-7.

(2) No printing (entirely black).

See page 3-6-3.


(6) A black line appears longitudinally.

See page 3-6-5.


(10) Printing is
blurred.

See page 3-6-7.

(3) Printing is too


light.

See page 3-6-4.


(7) A black line appears laterally.

(4) Background is
visible.

See page 3-6-4.


(8) One side of the
printing is darker than the other.

See page 3-6-6.

See page 3-6-6.

(11) The leading


edge of the
printing is consistently misaligned with the
original.

(12) Paper creases.

See page 3-6-8.

See page 3-6-8.

3-6-1

354

(13) Offset occurs.

See page 3-6-9.

3-6-2

(14) Printing is party missing.

See page 3-6-9.

(15) Fixing is poor.

See page 3-6-10.

354

(1) No printing (entirely white).

Causes
1. Insufficient toner of the imaging unit.
2. No transfer charging.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. Insufficient toner of the imaging unit.

Replace the imaging unit.

2. No transfer charging.
A. Poor attachment of the transfer roller.

Check if the transfer roller is attached securely, if


not, reattch it.

B. The connector terminals of the Check for continuity across the terminals; if none,
HVTPCB make poor contact.
replace them.
C. Defective CPCB.

If 24 V DC is not output at CN4-1on the CPCB or


CN4-3 fails to go low, replace the CPCB.

D. Defective HVTPCB.

If transfer charging fails while the CPCB is okay,


replace the HVTPCB.

(2) No printing (entirely black).

Causes
1. Main charger fails to turn on.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Main charger fails to turn on.


A. Broken main charger wire.

Replace the imaging unit.

B. The connector terminals of the Check for continuity across the terminals; if none,
HVTPCB make poor contact.
replace them.
C. Defective CPCB.

If 24 V DC is not output at CN4-1on the CPCB or


CN4-2 fails to go low, replace the CPCB.

D. Defective HVTPCB.

If main charger fails while the CPCB is okay, replace the HVTPCB.

3-6-3

354

(3) Printing is too


light.

Causes
1. No developing bias output.
2. Insufficient toner of the imaging unit.
3. Dirty or deteriorated imaging unit (drum).

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. No developing bias output.
A. Shorted or broken developing
bias wire.

Check for continuity. If none, repair wiring.

B. The connector terminals of the Check for continuity across the terminals; if none,
HVTPCB make poor contact.
replace them.
C. Defective CPCB.

If 24 V DC is not output at CN4-1on the CPCB or


CN4-4 and CN4-5 changes to low during printing, if
not, replace the CPCB.

D. Defective HVTPCB.

If the developing bias is not output while the CPCB


is okay, replace the HVTPCB.

2. Insufficient toner of the imaging unit.

Replace the imaging unit.

3. Dirty or deteriorated imaging


unit (drum).

Replace the imaging unit (drum).

(4) Background is
visible.

Causes
1. Defective imaging unit, or insufficient toner.
2. Defective high voltage transformer PCB.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective imaging unit, or insufficient toner.

Check the imaging unit. If defective or there is no


toner, replace it.

2. Defective HVTPCB.

Check the HVTPCB. If defective, replace it.

3-6-4

354
(5) A white line appears longitudinally.

Causes
1. Dirty heat roller.
2. Dirty press roller.
3. Foreign matter between the developing roller and the developing blade.
4. Flawed imaging unit (drum).
5. Dirty imaging unit (dirt inside unit or on shield glass).

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. Dirty heat roller.

Clean or replace the heat roller.

2. Dirty press roller.

Clean or replace the press roller.

3. Foreign matter between the


developing roller and the developing blade.

Replace the imaging unit.

4. Flawed imaging unit (drum).

Replace the imaging unit.

5. Dirty imaging unit (dirt inside


unit or on shield glass).

Clean or replace the imaging unit.

(6) A black line appears longitudinally.

Causes

Causes
1. Dirty main charger.
2. Flawed drum.
3. Foreign matter on the developing blade.

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Dirty main charger.

Clean or replace the main charger.

2. Flawed drum.

Replace the imaging unit (drum).

3. Foreign matter on the develop- Replace the imaging unit.


ing blade.

3-6-5

354
(7) A black line appears laterally.

Causes
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty imaging unit (developing section).

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. Flawed drum.

Replace the imaging unit (drum).

2. Dirty imaging unit (developing


section).

Replace the imaging unit.

(8) One side of the


printing is darker than the other.

Causes
1. Defective imaging unit (defective charging, toner leakage,
etc.)
2. Dirty main charger wire.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective imaging unit (defective charging, toner leakage,


etc.)

Check the imaging unit. If defective, replace it.

2. Dirty main charger wire.

Check the main charger wire and, if it is dirty,


clean.

3-6-6

354
(9) Black dots appear on the
printing.

Causes
1. Dirty or flawed drum.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. Dirty or flawed drum.

(10) Printing is
blurred.

Replace the imaging unit (drum).

Causes
1. Deformed heat roller.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Drive system problem.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Deformed heat roller.

Check the heat roller visually and, if it is deformed, replace.

2. Deformed press roller.

Check the press roller visually and, if it is deformed, replace.

3. Drive system problem.

Check the gears and belts. Grease the gears if


necessary.

3-6-7

354

(11) The leading


edge of the
printing is consistently misaligned with the
original.

Causes
1. Misadjusted paper leading edge registration timing.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. Misadjusted paper leading
edge registration timing.

(12) Paper creases.

Readjust the paper leading edge registration timing. (see page 3-3-44)

Causes
1. Paper curled.
2. Paper damp.
3. Defective fixing press springs.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Paper curled.

Check the paper storage conditions. If any, replace the paper.

2. Paper damp.

Check the paper storage conditions. If any, replace the paper.

3. Defective fixing press prings.

Replace the fixing press springs.

3-6-8

354
(13) Offset occurs.

Causes
1. Cleaning lamp fails to light.
2. Defective cleaning brush.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Causes
1. Cleaning lamp fails to light.

A. The connector terminals of the Check for continuity across the connector termicleaning lamp make poor con- nals; if none, replace them.
tact.
B. Defective cleaning lamp.

Check for continuity across the cleaning lamp terminals; if none, replace the cleaning lamp.

C. Defective CPCB.

If the cleaning lamp lights when CN5-4 on the


CPCB is held low, replace the CPCB.

2. Defective cleaning brush.

Replace the imaging unit.

(14) Printing is party missing.

Causes

Causes
1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
3. Drum condensation.
4. Flawed drum.

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Paper damp.

Check the paper storage conditions. If any, replace the paper.

2. Paper creased.

Change the paper.

3. Drum condensation.

Clean the imaging unit (drum).

4. Flawed drum.

Replace the imaging unit (drum).

3-6-9

354

(15) Fixing is poor.

Causes
1. Wrong paper.
2. Defective fixing press springs.
3. Flawed heat roller.
4. Flawed press roller.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Wrong paper.

Check if the paper meets specifications.

2. Defective fixing press springs.

Replace the fixing press springs.

3. Flawed heat roller.

Replace the heat roller.

4. Flawed press roller.

Replace the press roller.

3-6-10

354

3-6-2 Paper jams


Problem
Error indicator
lamp lights.

Causes/check procedures
A piece of paper torn is
caught around the paper
feed switch, eject switch,
document detection switch
or ADF timing switch.

Corrective measure
Check visually and remove it, if any.

Defective paper feed switch. If CN17-2 on the CPCB remains low


or high when the paper feed switch is
turned on and off, replace the paper
feed switch.
Defective eject switch.

If CN2-3 on the CPCB remains low or


high when the eject switch is turned
on and off, replace the eject switch.

Defective document
detection switch.

If CN11-14 on the CPCB remains low


or high when the document detection
switch is turned on and off, replace
the document detection switch.

Defective ADF timing switch. If CN11-11 on the CPCB remains low


or high when the ADF timing switch is
turned on and off, replace the ADF
timing switch.
Check if the ADF paper feed Check and remedy. (Replace the pad
roller and ADF pad are in
guide spring if deformed.)
contact with each other
correctly.
Check if the ADF pad is dirty Check visually and clean or replace.
or deformed.
(see page 3-3-15)
Check if the ADF conveying
roller and ADF upper pulley
are in contact with each
other correctly.

Check and remedy. (Replace the


crimp-style spring if deformed.)

Check if the ADF eject roller


and ADF upper pulley are in
contact with each other
correctly.

Check and remedy. (Replace the


crimp-style spring if deformed.)

Check if the paper feed


pulley is deformed.

Check visually and replace deformed


pulley. (see page 3-3-5)

Check if the peper feed pad


is dirty or deformed.

Check visually and clean or replace.


(see page 3-3-7)

3-6-11

354
Problem
Error indicator
lamp lights.

Causes/check procedures

Corrective measure

Check if the upper feed


roller and lower feed roller
are in contact with each
other correctly.

Check and remedy. (Replace the


crimp-style spring if deformed.)

The guide plate along the


paper conveying path is
deformed.

Check visually and correct or replace


if necessary.

Check if the press roller is


extremely dirty or deformed.

Check visually and clean or replace.


(see page 3-3-32)

Check if the separation claw Check visually and clean or replace.


is dirty or deformed.
(see page 3-3-33)

3-6-12

Check if the heat roller and


separation claw are in
contact with each other
correctly.

Check visually and repair if the


separation claw spring is off.
(see page 3-3-33)

Check if the eject roller and


eject pulley are in contact
with each other correctly.

Check and remedy. (Replace the


crimp-style spring if deformed.)

354

3-6-3 PCB terminal voltages


Precautions
When handling the circuit boards, do not touch the components with bare hands.
ICs can be damaged by static discharges. If a PCB contains ICs, do not touch the
ICs.
Store the circuit boards wrapped in aluminum foil, conductive sponge rubber, or
similar material.
( 1 ) Power source PCB
CN2-1 F2

CN3-1

CN5-1

CN6-1

F1

HS2
F4
C3

J19

L7

R25

C26

TH2

C30
R27

MOV1
C1
R1

R23
C2

L4

D4
R3

R2

R10
D6
R9 J22
VR1 D8
R8 J16

R19
R16

R7

D5

U1

D12

R4
R11
R12

R20

R21

D10

HS1

C7
R6 C39

R5

3542803

C14

J18

C9

C8

C5 C6 C10

C11

D2

C4

D1

D3

R26

J23

C34

R14

R15
R24

Q1

C13

R30

C15

D7

Z2

TH1

R17

T1
R18

C35

C12

D9

U2
C36

R36

F3

C32

C19

R34

L2

L1

C33

C23

R37

CN1

C20

R29 J21

C17

C21

F5

C18

F6

C43

12.5A
125V

J20

C28

C25

HS3

D14

R22

D11

D13 C44

L6

C27
R28 L5

R35

C16

C45

C22

Terminals (CN)

Voltage

Remarks

1-1
1-4
1-8
1-9
1-10

1-2
1-6
1-2
1-2
1-2

24 V DC
5 V DC
12 V DC
-12 V DC
5/0 V DC

24 V DC supply to CPCB, output


5 V DC supply to CPCB, output
12 V DC supply to CPCB, output
-12 V DC supply to CPCB, output
H off/on, input

2-1

3-1

Local voltage

AC power supply, input

5-1

6-1

Local voltage

H terminal voltage

3-6-13

354

( 2 ) Control PCB

22

21
2

J006

B507

16

IC205

JP401

CN19
37

38
IC403

J004

36

35

IC4

14

IC402

TP1

36

73

72
IC400

JP400

IC6

37

72

IC401

36

RA400

IC1

41
40

C409

5
1
IC3

1
160 1
IC2

IC10

48

+
15

15

33

CN9

C002

C001

IC304

1
IC303

TP001

TP002

ON
OFF

C301

C006

16

C005

17

C311

C331

IC5

21

VR300

TP301

TP300

J007

22

TP302

IC302

J002

C309

IC301

C313

+
C306

C315

X300

49

32

SW1

B412

Z101

C337

J005

19

IC9

14

CN12

18

144

D1
Q1

IC305

B403
B404
B405
B406
B407
B408
B409
B410
B411

CN11

B416

B402

108
109

B401

VR1

X1

D2

TP2

D100

B414
C332 B415

25

5
80

15

11

B400

13

64

52

72

IC8

81

120
121
C16

CN7

D105

D3

IC207

37
36
1

144

1
IC102

108

73

51

IC501

D501 D500

CN4 7

IC103

IC101

X200

IC200

D101
1

IC500

D502

19

IC104

73

36

108

33

20

32

CN18

72

37

144

109

CN8

D102

X100

14

14

IC502

17

IC202

IC20

32

54
IC100

Q103 1

IC107

49

33

48

12
CN14

CN20

B500

B501

14

1
B503

D506 D507 D504 D503 D505

B505
X500

39 19
40 20

C225

CN13

B504

10

CN1

B413

CN15

CN10

+
+
+

B506

CN5

IC300

C136

IC105

3542802

IC7

J008
Q3Q2

1
3
1
6

3
1

IC208
IC106

B502

REV:1

1
2

3-6-14

IC11
Q104

D4

CN6
CN2
CN17
CN3
J001

CN16

J003

354-1
354
Terminals (CN)

Voltage

Remarks

1-1
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-7

1-2
1-4
1-2
1-2
1-4

24 V DC
5 V DC
12 V DC
-12 V DC
5/0 V DC

24 V DC power supply, input


5 V DC power supply, input
12 V DC power supply, input
-12 V DC power supply, input
H off/on, output

2-1
2-3

2-2
2-2

5 V DC
5/0 V DC

5 V DC supply to ESW, output


ESW off/on, input

3-1
3-2

3-3
3-3

5 V DC
5/0 V DC

5 V DC supply to TEDS, output


TEDS off/on, input

4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6

4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7

24 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
5/0 V DC

24 V DC supply to HVTPCB, output


HVTPCB main charger off/on, output
HVTPCB transfer charger off/on, output
HVTPCB developing bias1 off/on, output
HVTPCB developing bias2 off/on, output
Main charger leak signal, input

5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4

1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2

24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC

FSOL off/on, output


24 V DC supply to FSOL, output
24 V DC supply to CL, output
CL off/on, output

6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6

1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2

24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24/0 V DC (Pulse)

MM drive (A)
MM drive (A)
24 V DC supply to MM, output
24 V DC supply to MM, output
MM drive (B)
MM drive (B)

7-1
7-2
7-3
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-9
7-10

1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2

5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)

Polygon motor clock, output


Polygon motor sync, output
Polygon motor on/off, output
24 V DC supply to LSU, output
BD sensor, input
5 V DC supply to LSU, output
Laser on/off, output
Laser on permission, output

10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11

10-21
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-15
10-21
10-15
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-21

5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
Audio frequency
5/0 V DC
Audio frequency
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC

Line polarity detection, input


Line polarity detection, input
TEL/FAX switching, output
Pulse dial, output
Image data, input
Reception switching, output
Image data, output
TEL GND off/on, output
Mute off/on, output
Incoming call off/on, input
Telephone off-hook off/on, input

3-6-15

354
Terminals (CN)

Voltage

Remarks

10-12
10-13
10-14
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20

10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-21
10-21

Audio frequency
12 V DC
12 V DC
-12 V DC
-12 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC

Reception, input
12 V DC supply to NCUPCB, output
12 V DC supply to NCUPCB, output
-12 V DC supply to NCUPCB, output
-12 V DC supply to NCUPCB, output
5 V DC supply to NCUPCB, output
5 V DC supply to NCUPCB, output

11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-8
11-9
11-11
11-12
11-14

11-7
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-10
11-10
11-13
11-13

5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC

Reset signal to OPCB, output


Control signal from OPCB, input
Control signal to OPCB, output
Serial signal from OPCB, input
Clock signal to OPCB, output
Serial signal to OPCB, output
5 V DC supply to OPCB, output
5 V DC supply to ADFTIMSW, output
ADFTIMSW off/on, input
5 V DC supply to DDSW, output
DDSW off/on, input

12-2

12-1

Audio frequency

Speaker output signal

13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6

1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2

24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24/0 V DC (Pulse)

ADFM drive (A)


ADFM drive (A)
24 V DC supply to ADFM, output
24 V DC supply to ADFM, output
ADFM drive (B)
ADFM drive (B)

14-1
14-2

1-2
1-2

24 V DC
24/0 V DC

24 V DC supply to FM, output


FM off/on, output

15-1
15-3
15-4
15-6
15-8
15-9
15-10

15-2
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-7
15-7

5/0 V DC
5 V DC
-12 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
24/0 V DC (Pulse)
24 V DC

Analog image signal from CIS, input


5 V DC supply to CIS, output
-12 V DC supply to CIS, output
Control signal to CIS, output
Clock signal to CIS, output
LED control signal to CIS, output
24 V DC supply to CIS, output

17-2
17-3
17-4
17-6

17-1
17-1
17-5
17-5

5/0 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC

FSW off/on, input


5 V DC supply to FSW, output
5 V DC supply to PSSW, output
PSSW off/on, input

18-1

18-2

3-6-16

TH detection voltage, input

354
( 3 ) Operation unit PCB
SW13

SW15

SW17

SW19

SW21

JP48
CN1

R21
R25

JP39

JP40

R19
R18

JP44

JP45

JP38

C1

SW14

SW16

SW18

SW20

SW22

C2
C3
R1
JP49
R4
R3
R6
R2

R20

JP46

JP41

JP43

JP42

R5
R7
C8
JP47

C11
2

JP37
JP36
JP35

C4
C6

JP51

L1

L3

JP34
JP33

14

13

CN2

JP50

IC1

SW24

JP31
JP32

SW25A

64

R8
R9
R22
R23
R24

JP30
JP29
JP28
JP27

C13

JP26

X1

JP25
JP24

C5

C12
C9

SW25B

SW23

C7
R12
R11

33

32

C10

LED6

LED5

LED4

LED8

R14
R10

R15

JP18

LED7

JP19

JP17
R17
R16

JP15
JP2
JP3

JP6
R13

JP14

JP1

JP12

SW3

SW6

JP4

SW12

SW9

SW1

JP5

SW28

JP10

SW27

LED1

JP11

SW2

SW5

Q5

JP13

SW8

SW11

Q6

SW29

Q7

Q4

LED3

Q1

JP16

SW26

SW32

Q2

SW31

Q3

LED2

SW30

L2

JP23
JP22
JP21
JP20

JP7
JP8

1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2

5 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
5/0 V DC (Pulse)

SW4

1-1
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8

Voltage

SW7

Terminals (CN)

SW10

JP9

Remarks
5 V DC supply from CPCB, input
Serial signal to CPCB, output
Clock signal from CPCB, input
Serial signal from CPCB, input
Control signal from CPCB, input
Control signal to CPCB, output
Reset signal from CPCB, input

3-6-17

354
( 4 ) Network control unit PCB

CN1

Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20

3-6-18

1-21
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-15
1-21
1-15
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-21
1-21

Voltage
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC (Pulse)
Audio frequency
5/0 V DC
Audio frequency
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
Audio frequency
12 V DC
12 V DC
-12 V DC
-12 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC

Remarks
Line polarity detection, output
Line polarity detection, output
TEL/FAX switching, input
Pulse dial, input
Image data, output
Reception switching, input
Image data, input
TEL GND off/on, input
Mute off/on, intput
Incoming call off/on, output
Telephone off-hook off/on, output
Reception, output
12 V DC supply from CPCB, input
12 V DC supply from CPCB, input
-12 V DC supply from CPCB, input
-12 V DC supply from CPCB, input
5 V DC supply from CPCB, input
5 V DC supply from CPCB, input

354

3-6-4 Electrical problems


Problem
(1)
The machine
does not
operate when
the power
plug is
connected to
a wall outlet.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

No electricity at the
power outlet.

Measure the input voltage.

The power cord is not


plugged in properly.

Check the contact between the power plug


and the outlet.

Broken power cord.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.

Blown fuse in the


PSPCB.

Check for continuity. If none, remove the


cause of blowing and replace the fuse.

The machine is
opened.

Close the machine securely.

Defective safety
switch.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If


none, replace the safety switch.

Defective PSPCB.

Check if 5 V DC at CN1-4 on the PSPCB, 24


V DC at CN1-1, 12 V DC at CN1-8 or
-12 V DC at CN1-9 are output. If none,
replace the PSPCB.

(2)
The machine is
Error indicator opened.
lamp lights.
Poor attachment of
safety switch.

Close the machine securely.


Check if the safety switch is attached
correctly.

Defective safety
switch.

Check for continuity. If none when the safety


switch is on, replace the safety switch.

A piece of paper torn


is caught around the
paper feed switch,
eject switch or ADF
timing switch.

Check visually and remove it, if any.

Defective paper feed


switch.

If CN17-2 on the CPCB remains low or high


when the paper feed switch is turned on and
off, replace the paper feed switch.

Defective paper size


switch.

If CN17-6 on the CPCB remains low or high


when the paper size switch is turned on and
off, replace the paper size switch.

Defective document
detection switch.

If CN11-14 on the CPCB remains low or high


when the document detection switch is turned
on and off, replace the document detection
switch.

Defective ADF timing


switch.

If CN11-11 on the CPCB remains low or high


when the ADF timing switch is turned on and
off, replace the ADF timing switch.

3-6-19

354
354-1
Problem

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

(2)
Defective eject switch. If CN2-3 on the CPCB remains low or high
when the eject switch is turned on and off,
Error indicator
replace the eject switch.
lamp lights.
Polygon motor of the
laser scanning unit
problem.
(3)
The main
motor does
not rotate.

Check for connection of the CPCB and the


laser scanning unit. If not, replace the laser
scanning unit.

Check for the continuity across the connector


Poor contact in the
main motor connector terminals. If none, replace the main motor
connector terminals.
terminals.
Defective CPCB.

Check if 24 V DC is output at CN6-3 and


CN6-4 on the CPCB, or if the motor drive coil
energination pulse signals are present at
CN6-1, 2, 5 and 6. If not, replace the CPCB.

Defective main motor. If the main motor does not rotate while the
CPCB is okay, replace the main motor.
(4)
The paper
feed solenoid
does not
operate.

(5)
The cooling
fan motor
does not
rotate.

(6)
The ADF
motor does
not rotate.

3-6-20

Poor contact in the


paper feed solenoid
connector terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Broken paper feed


solenoid coil.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,


replace the paper feed solenoid.

Defective CPCB.

Check if 24 V DC is not output at CN5-2 on


the CPCB, or if the paper feed solenoid
operates when CN5-1 on the CPCB held low.
If so, replace the CPCB.

Poor contact in the


cooling fan motor
connector terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Defective CPCB.

Check if 24 V DC is not output at CN14-1 on


the CPCB, or if the cooling fan motor rotates
when CN14-2 on the CPCB held low. If so,
replace the CPCB.

Defective cooling fan


motor.

If the cooling fan motor does not rotate while


the CPCB is okay, replace the cooling fan
motor.

Poor contact in the


ADF motor connector
terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Defective CPCB.

Check if 24 V DC is output at CN13-3 and


CN13-4 on the CPCB, or if the motor drive coil
energination pulse signals are present at
CN13-1, 2, 5 and 6. If not, replace the CPCB.

354
Problem

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

(6)
The ADF
motor does
not rotate.

Defective ADF motor.

If ADF motor does not rotate while CPCB is


okay, replace the ADF motor.

(7)
The fixing
heater does
not turn on.
(Fixing
thermostat 1,
2 operates.)

Broken fixing heater


wire.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the fixing


heater.

Defective fixing
thermostat.

Check for continuity. If none, remove the


cause and replace the fixing thermostat.

Broken fixing
thermistor wire.

Measure the resistance. If it is , replace the


fixing thermistor.

Defective CPCB.

If the fixing heater lights when CN1-7 on the


CPCB is held low, replace the CPCB.

Defective PSPCB.

If the fixing heater does not turn on while the


CPCB, fixing heater and fixing thermistor is
okay, replace the PSPCB.

Defective PSPCB.

If CN1 is disconnected from the CPCB the


fixing heater fails to turn off, replace the
PSPCB.

Defective CPCB.

If CN1-7 on the CPCB remains low, replace


the CPCB.

(8)
The fixing
heater does
not turn off.

Poor contact in the


(9)
The cleaning cleaning lamp
lamp does not connector terminals.
light.
Defective CPCB.

(10)
Main charger
does not turn
on. (The
paper is
printed in all
black.)

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.
If the cleaning lamp lights when CN5-4 on the
CPCB is held low, replace the CPCB.

Defective cleaning
lamp.

If cleaning lamp does not light while CPCB is


okay, replace the cleaning lamp.

Broken main charger


wire.

Replace the main charger wire.

Poor contact in the


HVTPCB connector
terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Defective CPCB.

If 24 V DC is not output at CN4-1on the CPCB


or CN4-2 fails to go low, replace the CPCB.

Defective HVTPCB.

If main charger fails while the CPCB is okay,


replace the HVTPCB.

3-6-21

354
Problem

Causes

(11)
No
developing
bias voltage is
output. (Print
density is
extremely
light.)

Shorted or broken
developing bias wire.

Check for continuity. If none, repair wiring.

Poor contact in the


HVTPCB connector
terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Defective CPCB.

If 24 V DC is not output at CN4-1on the CPCB


or CN4-4 changes to low during printing, if
not, replace the CPCB.

Defective HVTPCB.

If the developing bias is not output while the


CPCB is okay, replace the HVTPCB.

Poor attachment of
the transfer roller.

Check if the transfer roller is attached


correctly. If not, reattach correctly.

Poor contact in the


HVTPCB connector
terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Defective CPCB.

If 24 V DC is not output at CN4-1on the CPCB


or CN4-3 fails to go low, replace the CPCB.

Defective HVTPCB.

If transfer charging fails while the CPCB is


okay, replace the HVTPCB.

Poor contact in the


speaker connector
terminals.

Check for continuity across the connector


terminals. If none, replace them.

Defective CPCB.

If the sound output signal is not output from


CN12-2 on the CPCB, replace the CPCB.

Defective Speaker.

If the sound is not coming from the speaker


while the CPCB is okay, replace the speaker.

(12)
Transfer
charging is
not
performed.
(The paper is
not printed at
all.)

(13)
No sound
coming from
the speaker

3-6-22

Check procedures/corrective measures

354

3-6-5 Mechanical problems


Problem
(1)
No document
feed.

Causes/check procedures

Corrective measure

Check if the surfaces of the following


rollers or pulleys are dirty;
ADF paper feed roller, ADF conveying
roller, ADF eject roller, ADF upper pulley

Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Check if the ADF paper feed roller


and ADF pad are in contact with each
other correctly.

Check and remedy.


(Replace the pad plate
spring if deformed.)
(see page 3-3-15)

Check if the ADF pad is dirty or


deformed.

Check visually, clean or


replace.
(see page 3-3-15)

(2)
Check if the document table is
Skewed
installed incorrectly.
document feed.
Check if the ADF pad is dirty or
deformed.

Check visually and correct if


necessary.

(3)
Multiple sheets
of document
are fed at one
time.

Check if the document is excessively


curled.

Change the docuement, if


the document is curled.

Check if the ADF pad is dirty or


deformed.

Check visually, clean or


replace.
(see page 3-3-15)

(4)
Document jam

Check if the document is excessively


curled.

Change the docuement, if


the document is curled.

The guide plate along the document


conveying path is deformed.

Check visually and correct


or replace if necessary.

Check if the ADF converying roller


and ADF upper pulley are in contact
with each other correctly.

Remedy. Replace the crimpstyle springs if deformed.

Check if the ADF converying roller


and ADF upper pulley are in contact
with each other correctly.

Remedy. Replace the crimpstyle springs if deformed.

Check if the surfaces of the following


rollers or pulleys are dirty;
paper feed pulley, upper and lower
feed roller

Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Check if the paper feed pulley is


deformed.

Replace deformed pulley.


(see page 3-3-5)

Check if the paper feed pad is dirty or


deformed.

Check visually, clean or


replace.
(see page 3-3-7)

(5)
No paper feed.

Check visually clean or


replace.
(see page 3-3-15)

3-6-23

354
Problem
(6)
Skewed paper
feed.

Causes/check procedures

Check visually and correct if


necessary.

Check if the paper feed pulley is


deformed.

Replace deformed pulley.


(see page 3-3-5)

Check if the paper feed pad is dirty or


deformed.

Check visually, clean or


replace.
(see page 3-3-7)

Check if the paper feed pulley is worn.


(7)
Multiple sheets
of paper are fed
Check if the paper feed pad is dirty or
at one time.
deformed.

(8)
Paper jam.

Corrective measure

Check if the paper feed tray is


installed incorrectly.

Replace worn pulley.


(see page 3-3-5)
Check visually, clean or
replace.
(see page 3-3-7)

Check if the paper is excessively


curled.

Change the paper, if the


paper is curled.

Check if the paper is excessively


curled.

Change the paper, if the


paper is curled.

The guide plate along the paper


conveying path is deformed.

Check visually and correct


or replace if necessary.

Check if the upper and lower feed


rollers are in contact with each other
correctly.

Remedy. Replace the crimpstyle springs if deformed.

Check if the press roller is extremely


dirty or deformed.

Check visually and clean or


replace. (see page 3-3-32)

Check if the Separation claw is dirty or Check visually and clean or


replace. (see page 3-3-33)
deformed.
Check if the heat roller and separation Check visually and repair if
the separation claw spring is
claw are in contact with each other
off.
correctly.
(see page 3-3-33)

(9)
Toner drops on
the inner
machine.

Check if the eject roller and eject


pulley are in contact with each other
correctly.

Check and remedy.


(Replace the crimp-style
spring if deformed.)

Check if the imaging unit is extremely


dirty.

Clean the imaging unit.

Check if the pulleys, rollers or gears


(10)
Abnormal noise move smoothly.
is heard.

3-6-24

Grease the bearings and


gears.

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen